YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2007 All rights reserved.
RX-V661
Printed in Malaysia WJ70020
RX-V661
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
G
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON 0099
ITT 0068, 0131, 0267
ITV 0064, 0305
IMPERIAL 0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC 0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN 0068
KEC 0064, 0305
KLH 0099
KAISUI 0099
KENWOOD 0068, 0094
KODAK 0062, 0064
KOLIN 0068, 0070
KORPEL 0099
LG 0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI 0064
LENCO 0305
LEYCO 0099
LLOYD’S 0027
LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK 0099, 0267
LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC
0027
MEI 0062
MGA 0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC 0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC
1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN 0267
MANESTH 0072, 0099
MARANTZ 0062, 0108
MARTA 0064
MATSUI 0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA
0062
MEDION 0375
MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS 0099
METZ 0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA 0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY 0027
MYRYAD 0108
NAD 0131
NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL 0253
NECKERMANN 0108
NESCO 0099
NEWAVE 0064
NIKKO 0064
NOBLEX 0267
NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE 0068, 0347
OCEANIC 0027, 0068
OKANO 0342, 0375
OLYMPUS 0062, 0253
OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND 0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX 0069
PERDIO 0027
PHILCO 0062
PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA 0108
PILOT 0064
PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC 0267
PROLINE 0027
PROSCAN 0087, 1087
PROTEC 0099
PULSAR 0066
PYE 0108
QUASAR 0062, 1062
QUELLE 0108
RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK 0027
RADIOLA 0108
RADIX 0064
RANDEX 0064
REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC 0375
REPLAYTV 0641, 0643
REX 0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO 0066
SBR 0108
SEG 0267
SEI 0108
STS 0069
SABA 0068, 0347
SALORA 0070
SAMPO 0064, 0075
SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY 0066, 0075
SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE 0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO 0068
SEMP 0072
SHARP 0075, 0834
SHINTOM 0099, 0131
SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA 0064
SINGER 0072, 0099
SINUDYNE 0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI 0375
SUNSTAR 0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK 0267
TANDY 0027, 0131
TASHIKO 0027, 0064
TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS 0062, 0253
TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA 0068
TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347
TENOSAL 00 99
TENSAI 0027
THOMAS 0027
THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN 0068, 0131
TIVO 0645, 0663
TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER 0267
UNITECH 0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR 0072
VICTOR 0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC 0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN 0027
WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA 0068
YAMISHI 0099
YOKAN 0099
YOKO 0267
ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
RX-V661_G-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 10:57 PM
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then
disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
Note
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be
connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
This symbol mark is according to the
EU directive 2002/96/EC.
This symbol mark means that electrical
and electronic equipment, at their end-
of-life, should be disposed of separately
from your household waste.
Please act according to your local rules
and do not dispose of your old products
with your normal household waste.
1 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
English
Notice ....................................................................... 2
Features ................................................................... 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Getting started ........................................................ 4
Quick start guide .................................................... 5
Connections........................................................... 11
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening
room ................................................................... 28
Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 28
Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 33
Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 33
Creating your original SCENE templates................ 36
Playback ................................................................ 37
Basic procedure ....................................................... 37
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38
Selecting the front speaker set ................................. 38
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 39
Displaying the current status of this unit on a video
monitor ................................................................ 39
Using your headphones............................................ 40
Muting the audio output........................................... 40
Playing video sources in the background of an audio
source................................................................... 40
Displaying the input source information ................. 40
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 41
Sound field programs.......................................... 42
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 42
Sound field program descriptions............................ 42
Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decod-
ing mode)............................................................. 47
Using audio features ............................................. 48
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 48
Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 48
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 48
Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo ....49
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 49
FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 50
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 50
Manual tuning.......................................................... 50
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 51
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 51
Selecting preset stations........................................... 52
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 52
Radio Data System tuning
(Europe model only)......................................... 53
Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 53
Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY
SEEK mode)........................................................ 54
Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data ser-
vice ...................................................................... 55
Using iPod™.......................................................... 56
Controlling iPod™................................................... 56
Recording .............................................................. 58
Advanced sound configurations...........................59
Changing sound field parameter settings................. 59
Selecting decoders ................................................... 64
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........67
Using SET MENU................................................... 69
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 70
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 76
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 79
Remote control features........................................82
Using the remote control for the SCENE feature .... 82
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 83
Setting remote control codes ................................... 85
Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 87
Changing source names in the display window....... 88
Macro programming features .................................. 89
Clearing configurations ........................................... 92
Using multi-zone configuration............................95
Connecting Zone 2................................................... 95
Controlling Zone 2................................................... 96
Advanced setup......................................................98
Using the advanced setup ........................................ 98
Troubleshooting...................................................102
Resetting the system............................................109
Glossary................................................................110
Sound field program information......................112
Parametric equalizer information .....................113
Specifications .......................................................114
Index.....................................................................116
(at the end of this manual)
Front panel................................................................i
Remote control ....................................................... ii
List of remote control codes ................................. iii
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
“1SPEAKERS” or “
A
DVD” (example) indicates the name
of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to
the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for
the information about each position of the parts.
NOTICE
2 En
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS-ES | NEO:6 | 96/24. Product “DTS” and “DTS-ES | NEO:6”
are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
“96/24” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
Notice
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
•“1SPEAKERS” or “
A
DVD” (example) indicates the
name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.
Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this
manual for the information about each position of the
parts.
•
The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the
corresponding reference page(s).
iPod
TM
Features
3 En
INTRODUCTION
English
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 90 W + 90 W
Center: 90 W
Surround: 90 W + 90 W
Surround back: 90 W + 90 W
SCENE function
◆ 17 preset SCENE templates for various situations
◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability
◆ Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support
component (some models only) working with the SCENE
function
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix, Discrete, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated FM/AM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only)
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition
video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as
multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a
iPod controlling capability
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod
(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
◆ Playback information displaying capability
◆ Battery charging capability
Other features
◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ 5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-
channel input
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability includes
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video
→ component video) capability for monitor out
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes capability
◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2
using ZONE CONTROL
◆ Bi-amplification connection capability
◆ Sleep timer
Check that you received all of the following parts.
The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.
Features
Supplied accessories
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
1234
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
FREQ/TEXT EON MODE-PTY SEEK-START
VOLUME
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
SLEEP
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
TV VOL TV CH
Remote control
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
AM loop antenna
Optimizer microphone
Indoor FM antenna
GETTING STARTED
4 En
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert the four supplied batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the transmit indicator (
X
) does not flash or its light becomes
dim.
• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code
and program any acquired functions that may have been
cleared.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
Getting started
Notes
1
3
2
Caution
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE
plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may
cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire
hazard.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or
counterclockwise to the correct position using a
straight slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
Asia model
...................................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model
........................110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
230-
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Voltage indication
Quick start guide
5 En
INTRODUCTION
English
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.
In these steps, you need the following supplied
accessories.
❏ AM loop antenna
❏ Indoor FM antenna
The following items are not included in the package of this
unit.
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speakers .................................... 2
❏ Center speaker ................................... 1
❏ Surround speakers ............................. 4
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
The priority of the requirement of other speakers is
as follows:
1. Two surround speakers
2. Center speaker
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
❏ Active subwoofer .................................... 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cables ........................................ 7
❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player ............................................... 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor........................................... 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable .............................................. 1
Select an RCA composite video cable.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ..................... 1
Quick start guide
Front right
speaker
Subwoofer
Surround back
right speaker
Surround left
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround back left
speaker
Surround right
speaker
Center
speaker
Video monitor
DVD player
Enjoy DVD playback!
Step 1: Set up your speakers
☞
P. 6
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
Step 3: Turn on the power and
press SCENE 1 button
☞
P. 7
☞
P. 9
Preparation: Check the items
Quick start guide
6 En
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.
2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.)
cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker.
Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
3 Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal
part of this unit.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Front speakers and center speaker
Surround and surround back speakers
5 Connect the subwoofer cable to the
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and
the input jack of the subwoofer.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
A B
C
PHONO CD (PLAY)
IN OUT
(REC)
DVD
DVD DTV/CBL
CD DVD
MD/CD-RMD/CD-R
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
MONITOR OUT
DVR
DVD
IN OUT IN OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
OUTIN
VCR
SB(8CH)
FRONT(6CH)
SINGLE
CENTER CENTER
S VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
SURROUND
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
MULTI CH
INPUT
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
VIDEO
OUTIN
GND
FRONT B/ZONE2/
FRONT A
CENTER
SURROUND
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
TRIGGER
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTL ETS
SPEAKERS
HDMI
AUDIO
ANTENNA
AM
GND
FM
UNBAL
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
DOCK
OUT
REMOTE
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DTV/CBL OUTIN2
75
L
R
L
R
LR
1 2 3 4 5 6
L
R
L L
R R
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
DVD IN1
12 3 4
4
To the front left
speaker
To the front right
speaker
Center speaker
Loosen Insert Tighten
To the surround
right speaker
To the
surround back
left speaker
To the surround
left speaker
To the surround
back right speaker
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT jack
Subwoofer cable
Input jack
AV receiverSubwoofer
Quick start guide
7 En
INTRODUCTION
English
1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD
player and the DVD COAXIAL jack of this
unit.
2 Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack of your DVD player and
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.
3 Connect the video cable to the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video
input jack of your video monitor.
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
A B
C
PHONO CD (PLAY)
IN
OUT
(REC)
DVD
DVD DTV/CBL
CD DVD
MD/CD-RMD/CD-R
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
MONITOR OUT
DVR
DVD
IN OUT IN OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
OUTIN
VCR
SB(8CH)
FRONT(6CH)
SINGLE
CENTER CENTER
S VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
SURROUND
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
MULTI CH
INPUT
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
VIDEO
OUTIN
GND
FRONT B/ZONE2/
FRONT A
CENTER
SURROUND
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
TRIGGER
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTL ETS
SPEAKERS
HDMI
AUDIO
ANTENNA
AM
GND
FM
UNBAL
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
DOCK
OUT
REMOTE
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DTV/CBL OUTIN2
75
L
R
L
R
LR
1 2 3 4 5 6
L
R
L L
R R
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
DVD IN1
Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC
wall outlets.
Digital coaxial
audio output
jack
Digital coaxial audio
cable
DVD DIGITAL INPUT
coaxial jack
DVD player
AV receiver
Composite video
output jack
Video cable
DVD VIDEO jack
DVD player
AV receiver
Video monitor
AV receiver
Video cable
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack
Video
input jack
Quick start guide
8 En
4 Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and
indoor FM antenna to this unit.
See page 24 for the connection information.
y
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and
you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal
Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna
5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) for the power supply
of the other components (except Korea model). See page 24 for
details.
The type of the power plug is different depending on the models.
Note
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Open the lever
Insert
Close the lever
■ For further connections
• Using the other kind of speaker
combinations
☞ P. 12
• Connecting a video monitor via various
ways of the connection
☞ P. 18
• Connecting a DVD player via various ways
of the connection
☞ P. 19
• Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital
video recorder
☞ P. 20
• Connecting a set-top box
☞ P. 20
• Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or
a turntable
☞ P. 21
• Connecting an external amplifier
☞ P. 22
• Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-
channel audio connection
☞ P. 22
• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock
☞ P. 23
• Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
☞ P. 23
• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front
panel
☞ P. 23
• Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna
☞ P. 24
Quick start guide
9 En
INTRODUCTION
English
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position on the front panel.
3 Press
F
SCENE1 button.
“DVD Movie Viewing” appears in the front panel
display, and this unit automatically optimize own
status for the DVD playback.
y
The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while
this unit is in the SCENE mode.
4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.
y
If the connected DVD player is a Yamaha product and has
capability of the SCENE control signals with the REMOTE
OUT jack of this unit (see page 23), this unit can
automatically activate the DVD player and start playback
when you press the
F
SCENE1 button. Refer to the
instruction manual of the DVD player for further
information.
5 Rotate
0
VOLUME to adjust the volume.
When you change the input source or sound field program,
the SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the
selected SCENE button turns off.
■ Using the other SCENE buttons
In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding
SCENE button to enjoy the playback of the desired
sources.
Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the
connected DVD player...”
Press
F
SCENE2 (or
A
SCENE2) to select “Music
Disc Listening”.
Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...”
Press
F
SCENE3 (or
A
SCENE3) to select “TV
Viewing”.
Case C: “I want to listen to a music program of the
FM/AM radio station...”
Press
F
SCENE4 (or
A
SCENE4) to select “Radio
Listening”.
Step 3: Turn on the power and
press SCENE 1 button
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm
speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see
page 99).
Note
Quick start guide
10 En
• To use the “TV Viewing” template (Case B), you must connect
a satellite receiver, a cable TV receiver or an HDTV decoder to
this unit in advance. See page 20 for details.
• To use the “Radio Listening” template (Case C), you have to
tune into the desired radio station. See pages 50 to 52 for the
tuning information.
• To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM
loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM
antenna.
y
If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change
the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See
page 33 for details.
■ After using this unit...
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to
the standby mode.
This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small
amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from
the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby
mode, press the desired
F
SCENE buttons (or
A
SCENE) or
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel (or
I
POWER on the remote control). See page 25
for details.
Notes
What do you want to do with this
unit?
■ Customizing the SCENE templates
• Using various SCENE templates
☞ P. 33
• Creating your original SCENE templates
☞ P. 36
■ Using various input sources
• Basic controls of this unit
☞ P. 37
• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs
☞ P. 50
• Using your iPod with this unit
☞ P. 56
■ Using various sound features
• Using various sound field programs
☞ P. 42
• Using the pure direct mode for high fidelity
sound
☞ P. 48
• Customizing the sound field programs
☞ P. 59
■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
parameters for your listening room
(AUTO SETUP)
☞ P. 28
• Manually adjusting various parameters of
this unit manually
☞ P. 69
• Setting the remote control
☞ P. 82
• Adjusting the advanced parameters
☞ P. 98
■ Additional features
Automatically turning off this unit
☞ P. 41
CONNECTIONS
11 En
PREPARATION
English
Connections
Rear panel
A B
C
PHONO CD (PLAY)
IN
OUT
(REC)
DVD
DVD DTV/CBL
CD DVD
MD/CD-RMD/CD-R
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
MONITOR OUT
DVR
DVD
IN OUT IN OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
OUTIN
VCR
SB(8CH)
FRONT(6CH)
SINGLE
CENTER CENTER
S VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
SURROUND
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
MULTI CH
INPUT
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
VIDEO
OUTIN
GND
FRONT B/ZONE2/
FRONT A
CENTER
SURROUND
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
TRIGGER
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLETS
SPEAKERS
HDMI
AUDIO
ANTENNA
AM
GND
FM
UNBAL
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
DOCK
OUT
REMOTE
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DTV/CBL OUTIN2
75
L
R
L
R
LR
1 2 3 4 5 6
L
R
L L
R R
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
DVD IN1
TRIGGER
ANTENNA
AM
GND
FM
UNBAL
REMOTE
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
75
DOCK terminal
Connect a Yamaha iPod
universal dock
(sold separately).
☞ P. 23
AUDIO jacks
Connect the analog audio
cable plugs.
☞ P. 18-21
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
Connect the input source component
equipped with the multi-channel
output jacks.
☞ P. 22
ZONE 2 OUT jacks
Connect the amplifier in Zone 2.
☞ P. 95
PRE OUT jacks
Connect external amplifiers and an
active subwoofer.
☞ P. 22
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models
only)
☞ P. 4
HDMI connectors
Connect the HDMI components.
☞ P. 16
TRIGGER OUT
Outputs the control signals to external
components.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Connect the remote control
input and output jacks of the
Yamaha components.
☞ P. 23
Speaker terminals
Connect the speakers.
☞ P. 13
Video jacks
Connect the video cable
plugs.
☞ P. 18-20
AC OUTLET(S)
☞ P. 24
ANTENNA terminals
Connect the FM and AM
antenna.
☞ P. 24
DIGITAL INPUT/
OUTPUT jacks
Connect the digital audio
cable plugs.
☞ P. 19-21
12 En
Connections
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-
channel audio sources.
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.
Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field
programs (see page 42). To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “EXTRA
SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 29 and 70).
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction
of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is
not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front
speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
Placing speakers
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
30 cm (12 in) or more
SW
FR
PR
PL
FL
SBR
SBL
SL
SR
C
1.8 m (6 ft)
FR
PRPL
C
FL
1.8 m (6 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
13 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,
groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable
to the “–” (black) terminals.
Connecting speakers
Caution
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 25).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage
this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front
panel display.
• Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm
speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 99).
Note
SUB
WOOFER
PRE OUT
FRONT B/ZONE2/
FRONT A
CENTER
SURROUND
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
LR
L
R
L L
R R
Front speakers
(FRONT A)
Surround speakers
Subwoofer
Right
Center speaker
Surround back speakers
When you use single surround back speaker, connect the
speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE).
Left
Left
Left
Right
Right
EXTRA SP terminals
Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), presence speakers or
Zone 2 speakers. To select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA
SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see
page 70).
y
You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP
terminals in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 29).
14 En
Connections
■ Connecting the speaker cable
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.
2 Loosen the knob.
3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
■ Connecting the banana plug
(except Europe, Asia and Korea models)
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana
plug connector into the end of the
corresponding terminal.
■ Using bi-amplification connections
This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections
to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-
amplification.
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT
and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To
activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP”
to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 101).
When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the
shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the
instruction manuals of the speakers for details.
10 mm (0.4 in)
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Caution
Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the
LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)
crossovers.
Note
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
FRONT A
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
SINGLE
L
R
L
R
This unit
Left
Right
Front speakers
15 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling
frequency.
• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the
fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not
using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This
cap protects the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
y
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See
pages 17 and 79 for details.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y R PB P
PB
Y
P
R
S
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
Notes
16 En
Connections
■ HDMI compatibility with this unit
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of
the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI
connection (see page 41).
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
y
• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters
(16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit cannot be digitally output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to
establish the connection to the component.
Information on HDMI™
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
HDMI
components
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear
PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch,
2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.
This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following
standards:
• HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by
HDMI Licensing, LLC.
• HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed
by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
Notes
Notes
HDMI
HDMI cable plug
17 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
■ Audio signal flow
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be
output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO”
is set to “OTHER” (see page 75).
• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the
AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
■ Video signal flow
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT
VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the
input signals is as follows:
1. COMPONENT VIDEO
2. S VIDEO
3. VIDEO
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.
• This unit does not accept analog component video signals with
1080p of resolution.
• The OSD signal is not output at the VCR OUT, DVR OUT and
HDMI MONITOR OUT jacks and is not recorded.
• This unit does not deinterlace any analog video signals.
Audio and video signal flow
Notes
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
HDMI
AUDIO
OutputInput
Analog output
Digital output
Notes
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
Through
OutputInput
Video conversion ON (see page 79)
18 En
Connections
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR
OUT jack of this unit.
y
You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or
on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack
of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND
MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio
signals (see page 75).
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI
connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals
being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the
HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI
connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the
TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video
connection.
• Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack to display the video images on the video
monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
Notes
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR
OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
YP
B
P
R
PR PB
V
S
Y
TV (or projector)
Video in
Component video in
S-video in
HDMI in
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
19 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 79), be sure
to make the same type of video connections as those made for
your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV
to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your
other components to the VIDEO jacks.
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 79), the
converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT
jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video
connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the
default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for
“OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O
ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks,
priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
■ Connecting a DVD player
Connecting other components
Notes
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
A
DVD
DVD
DVD
DVD
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL COAXIAL
36
YP
B
P
R
DVD IN1
LR
C
O
V
S
PR PB Y
DVD player
HDMI out
Component video out
S-video out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
Coaxial out
20 En
Connections
■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
■ Connecting a set-top box
C
DVR
DVR
IN OUT IN OUT
DVR
VCR
OUTIN
VCR
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
OUTIN
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
YP
B
P
R
LR
V
S
V
S
S
V
PR PB Y
L
R
L
R
V
S
LR
S-video in
S-video out
Video out
Audio out
DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
S-video in
Video out
Audio out
Audio in
Video in
Component
video out
DVD recorder, PVR
Audio in
Video in
S-video out
B
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
DTV/CBL IN2
4
YP
B
P
R
O
V
L R
S
PR PB Y
Satellite receiver, cable TV
receiver or HDTV decoder
HDMI out
Component video out
Audio out
S-video out
Video out
Optical out
21 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
■ Connecting audio components
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O
ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76).
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-
output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,
the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
Notes
PHONO CD (PLAY)
IN
OUT
(REC)
CD
MD/CD-RMD/CD-R
MD/
CD-R
GND
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
COAXIAL
L
R
1 25
RL
C
O
R L
O
RL
R L
Turntable
CD recorder, MD
recorder or tape deck
Audio in
Optical in
Audio out
Audio out
Ground
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
CD player
Audio out
Optical out
Coaxial out
22 En
Connections
■ Connecting an external amplifier
This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output
or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 48).
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 48).
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 70)
and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70).
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
3 SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks
Surround back channel output jacks. When you only
connect one external amplifier for the surround back
channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack.
• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, this unit outputs the front
channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks.
• The audio signals output at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks
differ depending on the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting (see
page 70).
4 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
5 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-
amplifier.
If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT”
in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit automatically
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
*1
The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in
“MULTI CH SET” (see page 78).
Notes
L
R
SINGLE
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
PRE OUT
1
2
3
4
5
Notes
Notes
SB(8CH)
FRONT(6CH)
CENTER
SURROUND
SUB
WOOFER
MULTI CH
INPUT
L
R
L R LR
Subwoofer
out
Multi-format player/External
decoder (5.1-channel output)
Center out
Surround out
Front out
L
R
SB(8CH)
FRONT(6CH)
CENTER
SURROUND
SUB
WOOFER
MULTI CH
INPUT
L
R
*1
L R LRL R
Multi-format player/External
decoder (7.1-channel output)
Front out
Subwoofer
out
Center out
Surround back out
Surround out
23 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
dock
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can
station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using
the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of
this unit using its dedicated cable.
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
When the components are the Yamaha products and have
the capability of the transmission of the remote control
signals, connect the REMOTE IN jack and REMOTE
OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with
the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
y
• If the components have the capability of the SCENE control
signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding
components and start the playback when you use one of the
SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about
the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components.
• Connect the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit and the remote
control input jack of the components to control the components
by using the SCENE feature.
• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not
the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup
menu to “OFF” (see page 101).
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
DOCK
Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10, sold
separately)
REMOTE
IN
OUT
Yamaha
component
Remote
control out
Remote
control in
Infrared signal
receiver or
Yamaha
component
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
components before making connections.
Notes
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
PHONES
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
SPEAKERS
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING MEMORY
TUNING
ON/OFF
CONTROL
AUTO/MA N'L
ZONE 2
ZONE
EDIT
STRAIGHT
1
2
3
4
PURE DIRECT
SCENE
AUDIO SELECT
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
VOLUM E
OPTIMIZER MIC
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
OPTICAL
LR
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
ON
OFF
R
L
OPTICAL
AUDIO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
O
V
S
L
R
Game console or
video camera
Optical
output
Video
output
S-Video
output
Audio
output
24 En
Connections
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals. In general, these antennas should provide
sufficient signal strength.
y
See page 8 for connection information of the supplied indoor FM
antenna and AM loop antenna.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet
Korea model............................................................... None
Other models......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on.
However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main
zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when
B
MASTER ON/
OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to
the OFF position. For information on the maximum power
or the total power consumption of the components that can
be connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on
page 114.
Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
Notes
ANTENNA
AM
GND
FM
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the
antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33
ft) vinyl-covered wire
extended outdoors from a
window.
Connecting the power cable
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
AC OUTLETS
To the AC wall outlet
25 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
Refer to the right column for details.
2 Press and hold
C
TONE CONTROL on the
front panel and then press
B
MASTER ON/
OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this
unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the
D
PROGRAM selector on the
front panel to select “SP IMP.”.
“SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting
(“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display.
4 Press
C
TONE CONTROL on the front
panel repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”.
5 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front
panel to release it outward to the OFF
position to save the new setting and turn off
this unit.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
■ Turning on this unit
Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF
on the front panel
inward to the ON position to turn on this
unit.
When you turn on this unit by pressing
B
MASTER ON/
OFF, the main zone is turned on.
y
When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
■ Turning off this unit
Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF
on the front panel
again to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
•
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as
I
POWER and
H
STANDBY on the remote control are
operational only when
B
MASTER ON/OFF is pressed
inward to the ON position.
• As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this
unit.
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
(or
H
STANDBY) to set the main zone to the
standby mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
■ Turning on the main zone from the
standby mode
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
(or
I
POWER
)
to turn on the main zone.
y
• You can also turn on the main zone by pressing
F
SCENE (or
A
SCENE) buttons.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
• These buttons are operational only when
B
MASTER ON/
OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
Setting the speaker impedance
Caution
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm
speakers can be also used as the front speakers.
Note
TONE CONTROL
MASTER
ON
OFF
While holding
down
Turning this unit on and off
Notes
26 En
Connections
1B Input signal indicators
Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct
Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital
audio signals.
2C Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit function.
3 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
selected (see page 46).
4 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is
input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 16).
5 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 46).
6 DOCK indicator
Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23)
and V-AUX is selected as the input source. The DOCK
indicator also lights up when this unit is charging the
battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode.
7 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
8 YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without
any modifications (see page 28).
9 Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode
(see pages 50 to 52).
0 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 40).
A VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
D Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
E VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 46).
F Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 40).
G SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
H ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 96).
I NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see
page 49).
J DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP
sound field programs are selected (see page 42).
K Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
Front panel display
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
96
24
q PL
q EX
q PL
ENHANCER
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA
ZONE2 NIGHT
DOCK
AUTO
YPAO
PSHOLD RT
EON
PTYPTY
TUNED
MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q PL x
DSD
A B
SP
mS
ft
dB
96/24
HiFi DSP
LFE
LCR
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
dB
STEREO
CT
FB C E H I MLK
O
NJD
71
4 65 8 9 A2 3 0
G
L ........ Europe model only
27 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
L Radio Data System indicators
(Europe model only)
PS, PTY, RT and CT
Light up according to the selected Radio Data System
display mode.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
M SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 41).
N 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
O Input channel and speaker indicators
LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE
signal.
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Light up according to the number of presence and
surround back speakers set for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”
(see page 70) and “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) in
“SOUND MENU” when this unit is in the auto setup
(see page 28) or the speaker level setting in “SOUND
MENU” (see page 72) procedure.
y
• You can make settings for surround back speakers automatically
by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) or manually by
adjusting settings for “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) in
“SOUND MENU”.
• To use the presence speakers, set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to
“PRESENCE” (see page 29 or 70).
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Infrared window (
Y
)
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
Transmit indicator (
X
)
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
Display window (
J
)
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can
control.
Operation mode selector (
L
)
The function of some buttons depends on the operation
mode selector position.
AMP
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (see page 84).
TV
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or
PHONO (see page 83).
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 85.
Presence speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Surround back speaker indicators
L CR
SL SB SR
LFE
LFE indicator
Using the remote control
Notes
30 30
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
Remote control sensor
OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM
28 En
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
y
• You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that
appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual
uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
• Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector
on the remote control to
L
AMP.
• This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker
terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment.
1 Make sure of the following check points
before starting the AUTO SETUP operations.
❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.
❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.
❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
❏ The crossover frequency controls of the
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.
❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.
2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
The following menu screen appears on the video
monitor.
3 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be
when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the
attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone
to the tripod (etc.).
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
Using AUTO SETUP
Notes
VIDEO AUX
OPTIMIZER MIC
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
OPTICAL
LR
Omni-directional
microphone
AUTO:MENU
PRESENCENONE
. EXTRASPASSIGN
ZONE2 >FRONTB
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL
START
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Select
[
[
[
[
Optimizer microphone
29 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
PREPARATION
English
4 Press
D
l / h to select the desired setting
for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press
D
n.
Extra speaker assignment
EXTRA SP ASSIGN
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the
EXTRA SP terminals.
Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE
• When you use the alternative front speaker
system (see page 38)
Select “FRONT B”.
• When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see
page 96)
Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers
to the Zone 2 speakers. This unit drives the Zone 2
speakers by using the internal amplifier.
• When you use the presence speakers (see
page 12)
Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the
speakers to the presence speakers.
• When you do not use the EXTRA SP
terminals
Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP
terminals.
If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 101), you cannot
select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP
ASSIGN”.
5 Press
D
l / h to select “SETUP”.
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO
SETUP” settings and override the previous
settings.
• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”
settings and restore the previous settings.
• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”
parameters to the initial factory settings.
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have
previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change
the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see
page 101) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SOUND MENU”
(see page 70).
6 Press
D
l / h to select the desired setting of
“EQ” and then press
D
n.
Parametric equalizer type EQ
Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified
frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the
crucial frequency bands for the listening room and
adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to
create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can
select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment
from the following choices.
Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT
• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency
response of all speakers with higher frequencies
being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT
setting sounds a little harsh.
• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response
of all speakers. Recommended if all of your
speakers are of similar quality.
• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response
of each speaker in accordance with the sound of
your front speakers. Recommended if your front
speakers are of much higher quality than your other
speakers.
7 Press
D
n to select “START” and then press
D
ENTER to start the setup procedure.
This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test
tones are output from each speaker during the auto
setup procedure. Once all items are set, the
“AUTO:RESULT” display appears in the OSD.
• During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in
the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes
for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.
Note
Notes
Notes
30 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
This unit performs the following checks:
Speaker wiring WIRING
Checks which speakers are connected and the
polarity of each speaker.
Speaker size SIZE
Checks the frequency response of each speaker and
sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each
channel.
Speaker distance DISTANCE
Checks the distance of each speaker from the
listening position and adjusts the timing of each
channel.
Equalizing EQUALIZING
Checks and adjusts the tonal characteristics of all the
speakers by the setting of “EQ”.
Speaker level LEVEL
Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.
The display changes as follows.
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as
follows.
Number of speakers SP
Displays the number of speakers connected to this
unit in the following order:
Front/Back/Subwoofer
Speaker distance DIST
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position in the following order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
Speaker level LVL
Displays the speaker output level in the following
order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output
level
• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing
procedure, restart from step 4.
• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are
output.
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure,
the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen
appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on
page 32.
• When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the
number of warning messages appears in the above of
“RESULT” (see page 32).
• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR
PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK”
procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND
MENU” (see page 72) is automatically set to
“REVERSE”.
8 Press
D
ENTER to display the setup results
in detail.
AUTO:MENU
PRESENCENONE
EXTRASPASSIGN
ZONE2 >FRONTB
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL
. START
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Select
[
[
[
[
AUTO:RESULT
. RESULT
SP : 3/4/0.1
DIST: 4.50/5.30m
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
>
AUTO:CHECK
INITIALIZING
. WIRING
SIZE/DISTANCE
EQUALIZING
LEVEL
CHECKCH=CENTER
|||||;;;;;;;;
[]:Exit
[
Notes
AUTO:RESULT
. RESULT
SP : 3/4/0.1
DIST: 4.50/5.30m
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
>
RESULT:WIRING
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
[
[
31 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
PREPARATION
English
9 Press
D
l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the setup result displays.
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 67).
• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may
be longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your subwoofer.
• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the
same frequency to provide finer adjustments.
10 Press
D
ENTER to return to the top
“AUTO:RESULT” display.
11 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”
and “CANCEL” and then press
D
l / h to
select “SET” or “CANCEL”.
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
12 Press
D
ENTER to confirm your selection.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
13 Press
N
SET MENU to exit from “SET
MENU”.
14 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from
this unit.
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it
away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top
of this unit.
y
If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of
your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to
recalibrate your system.
Notes
Results of the speaker
connection and wiring
Results of the speaker
distance from the
listening position
Results of the setting of
each speaker size
Results of the parametric
equalizer of each speaker
Results of the speaker
output level
AUTO:RESULT
. RESULT
SP : 3/4/0.1
DIST: 4.50/5.30m
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
>
AUTO:RESULT
RESULT
SP : 3/4/0.1
DIST: 4.50/5.30m
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
. SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
>
SET MENU
.;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
32 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
■ If an error screen appears
Press
D
k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or
“EXIT” and then press
D
ENTER.
The following display is an example where “E-9:USER
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.
Choices: RETRY, EXIT
• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
■ If “WARNING” appears
When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the
“AUTO:RESULT” display. Check the warning messages
to correct your speaker settings.
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at
“WARNING” and then press
D
ENTER to
display the detailed information about the
warning.
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates
the number of warning messages.
2 Press
D
l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the warning displays.
y
• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO
SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 107.
• When the corresponding warning message is not
applicable to a speaker, “–
–” is displayed instead.
3 Press
D
ENTER to return to the top
“AUTO:RESULT” display.
Note
AUTO:ERROR
. E-9:USER CANCEL
Don't operate
any function.
>RETRY EXIT
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Enter
[
[
AUTO:RESULT
RESULT
. WARNING(3)
>SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SP : 3/4/0.1
DIST: 4.50/5.30m
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
WARNING:W-1
<OUT OF PHASE>
Reverse Channel
FL --
CENTER
PL PR
SL SR
SBL SBR
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
[
[
SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES
33 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
This unit is equipped with 17 preset SCENE templates for
various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory
setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to
each SCENE button:
SCENE 1: DVD Movie Viewing
SCENE 2: Music Disc Listening
SCENE 3: TV Viewing
SCENE 4: Radio Listening
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.
1 Press and hold the
F
SCENE (or
A
SCENE)
button for 3 seconds.
The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the
front panel starts to flash, and the name of the
currently assigned SCENE template appears in the
front panel display.
2 Rotate the
I
INPUT selector (or set the
operation mode selector to
L
AMP and then
press
D
l / h) to select the desired
template.
3 Press the
F
SCENE (or
A
SCENE) button
again to confirm the selection.
The selected SCENE template is assigned to the
SCENE button.
• If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds
from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is
automatically canceled.
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 82 for details.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Selecting the desired SCENE
template
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select the desired SCENE
template
Assign the
SCENE
template to the
SCENE button
1
DVD MovieView
1
1
or
Remote control
Flashes
3 seconds
3 seconds
Front panel
Notes
DVD Viewing
1
1
or
Remote control
Front panel
34 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?
y
You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 36 for details.
1
2
3
4
Radio Listening
CD Hifi Listening
CD Listening
CD Music Listening
iPod Listening
DVD Live Viewing
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD Viewing
Disc Hifi Listening
Music Disc Listening
Disc Listening
DVR Viewing
TV Viewing
Action Game Playing
RPG Playing
DVD
V-AUX
PHONO
DTV/CBL
TUNER (FM/AM)
DOCK
CD
DVD
DVR
Video sources
(DVD video,
Recorded video)
TV programs
Video games
iPod
Radio programs
Music discs (CD,
SACD or DVD-Audio)
SCENE templates
Which component do you
like for playback?
Vinyl records
Which source do you like to
play back?
LP Record Listening
Default
SCENE buttons
TV Sports Viewing
*
To listening to the iPod, you need to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (sold separately) to this unit (see page 56).
35 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
BASIC
OPERATION
English
■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions
The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons as the default setting.
*1
When the connected DVD player or CD player has the
capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to
the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the
DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features.
*2
You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod
is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this
unit.
SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features
DVD Viewing
DVD
*1
STRAIGHT
Select this SCENE template when you play back general
contents on the DVD player.
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD
*1
MOVIE
Sci-Fi
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on
your DVD player.
DVD Live Viewing
DVD
*1
ENTERTAINMENT
Music Video
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live
video on your DVD player.
DVR Viewing
DVR MOVIE Drama
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on
your digital video recorder.
Disc Hifi Listening
DVD
*1
PURE DIRECT
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high
fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player.
Music Disc Listening
DVD
*1
STEREO
2ch STEREO
Select this SCENE template when you play back music
discs on your DVD player.
Disc Listening
DVD
*1
STEREO
7ch STEREO
Select this SCENE template when you play back music
sources on your DVD player as the background music.
CD Hifi Listening
CD
*1
PURE DIRECT
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high
fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player.
CD Listening
CD
*1
STEREO
2ch STEREO
Select this SCENE template when you play back music
discs on your CD player.
CD Music Listening
CD
*1
STEREO
7ch STEREO
Select this SCENE template when you play back music
source on your CD player as the background music.
Radio Listening
TUNER MUSIC
ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM
radio programs.
iPod Listening
DOCK (V-AUX) MUSIC
ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Select this SCENE template when you play back music on
your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock.
TV Viewing
DTV/CBL STRAIGHT
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general
programs on your TV.
TV Sports Viewing
DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports
programs on your TV.
Action Game
Playing
V-AUX*
2
ENTERTAINMENT
Action Game
Select this SCENE template when you play action games
such as car racing and FPS games.
RPG Playing
V-AUX*
2
ENTERTAINMENT
Roleplaying Game
Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing
games.
LP Record Listening
PHONO PURE DIRECT
Select this SCENE template when you play back vinyl
records on your turntable.
1
2
4
3
36 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
You can create your original SCENE templates for each
SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 17 SCENE
templates to create the original SCENE templates.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP
and then press and hold the desired
A
SCENE button for 3 seconds.
The SCENE template customizing screen appears on
the video monitor.
When the SCENE template you want to customize is not
assigned to any of the
A
SCENE buttons, press
D
l / h
repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the
menu screen.
3 Press
D
k / n to select the desired parameter
of the SCENE template and then
D
l / h to
select the desired value of the selected
parameter.
You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE
template:
• INPUT: The input source component.
• MODE: The active sound field programs,
STRAIGHT or Pure Direct mode.
• NIGHT: The night listening mode (see page 49).
− SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening
mode.
− CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the
CINEMA mode.
− MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the
MUSIC mode.
4 Press the
A
SCENE button again to confirm
the edit.
y
An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE
template.
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding
A
SCENE buttons, you need to set the input
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 82 for details.
• You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE
button, and if you create another customized SCENE template,
this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with
the new one.
• The newly created template is only available for the assigned
SCENE button.
■ Rename the SCENE templates
Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3
of “Creating your original SCENE templates” and
then press
D
ENTER.
•Press
D
k / n to select the desired character.
•Press
D
l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the
space or the desired character.
•Press
E
RETURN to cancel the new name.
•Press
D
ENTER to confirm the new name.
Creating your original SCENE
templates
Note
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select the desired SCENE
template
Assign the SCENE
template to the
SCENE button
Create an original SCENE
template
[RETURN]:STATUS
[SCENE1]:SET
[ENTER]:Rename
NIGHT:SYSTEM
MODE:STRAIGHT
INPUT: DVD
.pDVDViewing[
SCENE1
[
Notes
PLAYBACK
37 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
y
Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on
the remote control to
L
AMP.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
y
See page 40 to display the input source information.
2 Rotate the
I
INPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (
B
)) to select
the desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.
y
The corresponding input selector button on the remote
control for the currently selected input source lights up for
approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the
remote control, showing which source component is
currently being operated.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 50 for details about tuning instructions.
4
Rotate
0
VOLUME
(or press
K
VOLUME +/–
)
to adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
y
• See page 48 to adjust the level of each speaker.
• This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
• You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume
level (see page 75).
5 Rotate the
D
PROGRAM selector (or press
one of the sound field program selector
buttons (
U
) repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display. See page 42 for details
about sound field programs.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source (see page 38).
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
• To display information about the currently selected sound
field program in the OSD, see page 59 for details.
Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to
“DTS” before the playback (see page 78).
Basic procedure
INPUT:DVD
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
Currently selected input source
Available input sources
Note
Sci-Fi
Currently selected sound field program
38 En
Playback
■ A quick guide to contents
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 22) as the input
source.
Rotate the
I
INPUT selector to select MULTI CH
(or
B
MULTI CH IN).
“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.
y
Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the
parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 78).
Sound field programs and the night listening mode cannot be
selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source.
Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT
A and/or FRONT B) on or off.
Press
1
SPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front
speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or
EXTRA SP speaker terminals.
The active front speaker set changes as follows:
• FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, “ZONE 2” or
“NONE” (see page 70).
• Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front
speaker setting.
■ Using the Zone B feature
When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 70),
you can use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP
speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).
Press
1
SPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in
the main room are muted.
• You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers
simultaneously.
• If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate
the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates
automatically (see page 46).
When you want to...
See
page
Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 48
Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 48
Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 59
Enjoy sources with a wide dynamic range at night 49
Use headphones 40
Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 49
Select a decoder to play back sources with 64
Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 41
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Note
Selecting the front speaker set
Notes
Notes
FRONT A
FRONT B
FRONT A
and
FRONT B
OFF
39 En
Playback
BASIC
OPERATION
English
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input
jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the
same input source.
y
• We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO”
in most cases.
• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 80).
Press
H
AUDIO SELECT (or
O
AUDIO)
repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack
select setting.
This feature is not available when no digital input jacks
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O
ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective
input jack (see page 76).
You can display the operating information of this unit on a
video monitor.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP
and then press
R
DISPLAY on the remote
control.
The current status screen appears in the OSD.
y
You can select the amount of time that the current status is
displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter
in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).
The OSD signal is not output at the VIDEO output jacks
and will not be recorded.
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital
signals (3) Analog signals
HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI
signals are not input, no sound is output.
COAX/OPT
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order: (1) Digital signals input
at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals
input at the OPTICAL jack. When no
signals are input, no sound is output.
ANALOG
Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
Note
A.SEL:AUTO
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
Currently selected audio input jack select setting
Available input sources
Displaying the current status of
this unit on a video monitor
Note
NIGHT:OFF
A.SEL:HDMI
INPUT:DVD
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
STATUSVOL:-40.0dB
40 En
Playback
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 46).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
Press
M
MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press
M
MUTE again to resume
the audio output.
y
• You can also rotate
0
VOLUME on the front panel or press
K
VOLUME +/– to resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 74).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons (
B
) on the
remote control to select a video source and then
an audio source.
y
Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the
desired setting to select the default background video input source
of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 78).
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP
and then press
N
SET MENU on the remote
control.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press
D
n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL
INFO” and then press
D
ENTER.
The audio information about the input source appears
in the OSD.
3 Press
D
l / h to toggle between the audio
and video information displays.
Using your headphones
Notes
Muting the audio output
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
PHONES
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
SPEAKERS
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING MEMORY
TUNING
ON/OFF
CONTROL
AUTO/MA N'L
ZONE 2
ZONE
EDIT
STRAIGHT
1
2
3
4
PURE DIRECT
SCENE
AUDIO SELECT
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
VOLUM E
OPTIMIZER MIC
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
OPTICAL
LR
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
ON
OFF
Playing video sources in the
background of an audio source
Displaying the input source
information
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
Audio sources
Video sources
SET MENU
.;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
41 En
Playback
BASIC
OPERATION
English
4 Press
N
SET MENU on the remote control
again to exit from “SET MENU”.
■ Audio information
“---” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
■ Video information
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 24).
Set the operator mode to
L
AMP and then press
S
SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press
S
SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is
set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound field
program.
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Press
S
SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly
until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel
display.
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
H
STANDBY (or
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF) to set the main
zone to the standby mode.
FORMAT
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to
analog input.
SAMPLING
The number of samples per second taken from
a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the input
signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a
multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
BITRATE
The number of bits passing a given point per
second.
FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or
PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically
switch decoders.
Note
HDMI RES.
Resolution of the HDMI signals input or
output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this
unit.
HDMI ERROR
Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices. See page 107
for details.
Using the sleep timer
SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP
SLEEP120min
Flashes
SLEEP
STRAIGHT
Lights up
SLEEPOFF
Disappears
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
42 En
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing
(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
• The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from
the front, back, left and right.
• You can change sound field parameters. See page 59 for details.
Rotate the
D
PROGRAM selector (or set the
operation mode selector to
L
AMP and then
press one of the sound field selector buttons (
U
)
repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 38).
• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field
program, this unit applies the selected program without
activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to
48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.
• When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher
than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
Sound field programs
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
Sound field program descriptions
Sound field indicators
DIALG. LIFT
SB ROOM SIZES. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLYS.INIT. DLY
P.ROOM SIZE
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
P.INIT. DLY
DSP LEVEL
4
MOVIE
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and
background music.
Available sound field parameters (see page 61)
Program description
Remote control
button
Name of the
program
Created sound
fields
Category of the
program
CINEMA DSP
or
HiFi DSP
Presence sound field
Listening position
Surround left
sound field
Surround right
sound field
Surround back sound field
43 En
Sound field programs
BASIC
OPERATION
English
■ For audio music sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 48).
• The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70).
Notes
CLASSICAL Hall in Munich
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal
standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener's virtual seat is
at the center left of the arena.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
CLASSICAL Hall in Vienna
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
CLASSICAL Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are
suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALG.LIFT
LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the
listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
LIVE/CLUB The Roxy Theatre
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left
of the hall.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALG.LIFT
LIVE/CLUB The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
44 En
Sound field programs
■ For various sources
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70).
■ For visual sources of music
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70).
Notes
ENTERTAINMENT Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,
the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an
optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
ENTERTAINMENT Action Game
This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range
per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining
a clear sense of directions.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game
This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field
designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the
movie scenes in the game.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
Notes
ENTERTAINMENT Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot
live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to
the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
3
ENTERTAIN
3
ENTERTAIN
3
ENTERTAIN
2
LIVE/CLUB
3
ENTERTAIN
HiFi DSP
45 En
Sound field programs
BASIC
OPERATION
English
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 64 for details.
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70).
Notes
MOVIE Standard
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel
audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded
by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
DSP LEVEL
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
S.LIVENESS
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
SB LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
MOVIE Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very
small to extremely large sound.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and
background music.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.
The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The
reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear
words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater.
The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound
depth.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
46 En
Sound field programs
■ Stereo playback
The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
■ The Compressed Music Enhancer
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
When you set “SUR. L/R SP”
to “NONE” (see page 71),
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 42).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71) in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 42). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 38).
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see
page 48) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 49) is selected, or
when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 47).
Note
STEREO 2ch STEREO
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 49 for details.
DIRECT
5
STEREO
STEREO 7ch STEREO
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2
channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,
etc.
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
PL LEVEL
PR LEVEL
MUSIC ENHANCER 2ch Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a
compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-
frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system.
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo.
Effect level
5
STEREO
HiFi DSP
6
ENHANCER
MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
Effect level
6
ENHANCER
Note
Notes
47 En
Sound field programs
BASIC
OPERATION
English
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Press
E
STRAIGHT (or
Q
STRAIGHT) to select
“STRAIGHT”.
■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode
Press
E
STRAIGHT (or
Q
STRAIGHT) so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources (Straight decoding mode)
STRAIGHT
USING AUDIO FEATURES
48 En
y
Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on
the remote control to
L
AMP.
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode
is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with
the least circuitry.
Press
G
PURE DIRECT (or
P
PURE DIRECT)
to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.
The
G
PURE DIRECT button lights up while this unit is
in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display
automatically dims.
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the Pure Direct mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the OSD
– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level
settings)
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this
unit is turned off.
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation
is performed.
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front left and right speaker channels.
y
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
1 Press
C
TONE CONTROL on the front
panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency
response (BASS).
2 Rotate the
D
PROGRAM selector to adjust
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
the low-frequency response (BASS).
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the
surround speakers may not match.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is
selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input
source.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
“AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see
page 72).
1 Press
C
LEVEL on the remote control
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
y
• Once you press
C
LEVEL on the remote control, you can
also select the speaker by pressing
D
k / n.
• Instead of “SUR.B.L” and “SUR.B.R”, “SUR.B” is
displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or
“LRGx1” (see page 71).
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the
setting of the speakers.
2 Press
D
l / h to adjust the speaker output
level.
•Press
D
h to increase the value.
•Press
D
l to decrease the value.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Using audio features
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Notes
Adjusting the tonal quality
Notes
Adjusting the speaker level
Note
Display Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SUR.B.L
Surround back left speaker
SUR.B.R
Surround back right speaker
PRNS L
Presence left speaker
PRNS R
Presence right speaker
49 En
Using audio features
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
Press
U
STEREO on the remote control
repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 72).
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the
D
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
• See page 64 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo”
mode.
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night.
1 Press
W
NIGHT on the remote control
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2 Press
D
l / h to adjust the effect level while
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is
displayed in the front panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following
cases:
–when the Pure Direct mode (see page 48) is selected.
–when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 38).
–when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness
depending on the input source and surround sound settings
you use.
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
Selecting the night listening mode
Effect.Lvl:MID
Notes
FM/AM TUNING
50 En
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Rotate the
I
INPUT selector on the front
panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2 Press
3
FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
7
TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press
2
PRESET/TUNING to turn
the colon (:) off.
4 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
• Press
5
h to tune into a higher frequency.
• Press
5
l to tune into a lower frequency.
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Rotate the
I
INPUT selector on the front
panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2 Press
3
FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
7
TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press
2
PRESET/TUNING to turn
the colon (:) off.
4 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
y
Hold down the button to continue searching.
FM/AM tuning
Note
Automatic tuning
AFM89.10MHz
AUTO
Lights up
No colon (:)
Manual tuning
Note
AFM89.10MHz
No colon (:)
51 En
FM/AM tuning
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in
order. You can then recall any preset station easily by
selecting the preset station number.
1 Rotate the
I
INPUT selector on the front
panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2 Press
3
FM/AM to select “FM” as the
reception band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press and hold
6
MEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
• You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations. Press
4
A/B/C/D/E and then
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h repeatedly after you
perform step 3 to select the preset station number under
which the first station will be stored.
• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store
FM stations automatically. Press
2
PRESET/TUNING
so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel
display and then press
5
PRESET/TUNING l after
pressing and holding
6
MEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after
searching for all the available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset
tuning” below.
• Only Radio Data System broadcasting station are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning (Europe model
only).
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station.
See page 50 for tuning instructions.
2 Press
6
MEMORY on the front panel.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 10 seconds.
3 Press
4
A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a
preset station group (A to E) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
Automatic preset tuning
A1:FM89.10MHz
AUTO MEMORY
Flashes
Flashes
Notes
Manual preset tuning
MEMORY
Flashes
A:FM89.10MHz
MEMORY
Preset station
group
Flashes
Colon (:)
52 En
FM/AM tuning
4 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
• Press
5
h to select a higher preset station number.
• Press
5
l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press
6
MEMORY while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the
operation mode selector to
L
SOURCE and then press TUNER
to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press
4
A/B/C/D/E (or press
D
A/B/C/D/E l
/ h) to select the desired preset station
group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
2 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h on the
front panel (or
D
PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) to select the desired preset
station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using
4
A/B/C/D/E
and
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front
panel.
See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column.
2 Press and hold
2
EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using
4
A/B/C/D/
E and
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column.
4 Press
2
EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
Notes
Selecting preset stations
A1:FM89.10MHz
MEMORY
Preset station number
Flashes
A1:FM89.10MHz
The displayed station has been stored as A1.
Exchanging preset stations
A1:FM89.10MHz
E1:FM89.10MHz
MEMORY
Flashes
Flashes
A5:FM89.10MHz
MEMORY
Flashes
Flashes
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)
53 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various
Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON
(enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.
Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data
System information: PS (program service), PTY (program
type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The
corresponding indicators light up in the front panel
display.
• You can select one of the Radio Data System display modes
only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator
lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this
unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the
station.
• You can select only the available Radio Data System display
modes being offered by the station.
• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit
may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In
particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and
may not be available even when the other Radio Data System
display modes are available.
• In case of poor reception conditions, press
7
TUNING AUTO/
MAN’L on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while
this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception
may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front
panel display.
• When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the
program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters
are displayed with the “_” (underscore).
• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using the automatic preset tuning
to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting
stations (see page 51).
• You can also use PTY SEEK mode to tune into the
desired Radio Data System broadcasting station
from the preset ones.
2 Press
G
FREQ/TEXT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data
System display mode.
• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “RT” to display the information on the
Radio Data System program currently being
received.
• Select “CT” to display the current time.
Radio Data System tuning
(Europe model only)
Displaying the Radio Data System
information
Notes
CTRTPTYPS
Frequency display
54 En
Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)
Use this feature to select the desired radio program by
program type from the all preset Radio Data System
broadcasting stations.
y
Use the automatic preset tuning feature to preset Radio Data
System broadcasting stations (see page 51).
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
SOURCE and then press
B
TUNER on
the remote control to select “TUNER” as the
input source.
2 Press
C
BAND repeatedly to select “FM” as
the reception band.
3 Press
G
PTY SEEK MODE on the remote
control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK
mode.
The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in
the front panel display.
y
To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press
G
PTY SEEK
MODE on the remote control again.
4 Press
D
PRESET/CH k / n on the remote
control to select the desired program type.
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
Selecting the Radio Data System
program type (PTY SEEK mode)
Flashes
NEWS
Program type Descriptions
NEWS
News
AFFAIRS
Current affairs
INFO
General information
SPORT
Sports
EDUCATE
Education
DRAMA
Drama
CULTURE
Culture
SCIENCE
Science
VARIED
Light entertainment
POP M
Popular music
ROCK M
Rock music
M.O.R. M
Middle-of-the-road music (easy-
listening)
LIGHT M
Light classics
CLASSICS
Serious classics
OTHER M
Other music
Lights up
POP M
55 En
Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)
BASIC
OPERATION
English
5 Press
G
PTY SEEK START on the remote
control to start searching for all the available
Radio Data System preset stations.
The name of the selected program type flashes and
the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel
display while this unit is searching for stations.
y
To stop searching for stations, press
G
PTY SEEK START
on the remote control again.
• This unit stops searching for stations when a station
broadcasting the selected program type is found.
• If the station found is not the one you desire, press
G
PTY
SEEK START again to resume searching for another
station broadcasting the same program type.
Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other
networks) data service of the Radio Data System station
network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this
unit automatically searches for all the available preset
stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data
service of the selected program type for a certain duration
of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this
unit automatically switches to the local station
broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back
to the national station once the EON data service ends.
• You can use this feature only when the EON data service is
available.
• The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only
when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data
System station.
1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel
display, select another Radio Data System program so
that the EON indicator lights up.
3 Press
G
EON on the remote control
repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data
System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS,
INFO or SPORT).
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
y
To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control
repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears
and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display.
Notes
POP M
PTY HOLD
Flashes Lights up
Using the enhanced other
networks (EON) data service
Notes
EON
NEWS
Lights up
USING IPOD™
56 En
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 46).
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
components” on page 84.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
“Troubleshooting” on page 107.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or
not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). The
DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode.
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as
the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done
with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)
or without it (simple remote mode).
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the OSD of this unit.
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD
of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod
in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for
your iPod to suit your personal preferences.
y
• The name of the song being played also appears in the front
panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in
“OPTION MENU” (see page 79).
• You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-
SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your
iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are
replaced with underscores “_”.
• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in
the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between
the “Settings” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy
watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
Using iPod™
Notes
Controlling iPod™
Notes
57 En
Using iPod™
BASIC
OPERATION
English
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
SOURCE and then press
R
DISPLAY on
the remote control.
The following display appears in the OSD.
2 Press
D
k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod
menu and then press
D
ENTER to begin
playback of the selected song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums
(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),
Composers (composers), Settings (settings)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.
y
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” appears
in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
y
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ”
appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of
songs are being repeated.
■ The function of the play information
display
1 Track number/total tracks
2 Name of the artist
3 Name of the album
4 Name of the song
5 Progress bar
6 Elapsed time
7 Shuffle and repeat icons
8 h (playback), e (pausing), f (search forward)
and w (search backward)
9 Remaining time
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Settings
iPod Top
1 All
iPod[Play]
1/9
FrankieZipper
Made-to-order
RoadtoIndia
||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;;
0:51-7:44
All
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
8
7
RECORDING
58 En
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• TONE CONTROL (see page 48) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 72) and the sound field programs (see page 42)
do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Rotate the
I
INPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (
B
)) to select
the source component you want to record
from.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
Recording
Caution
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being
recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and
adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your
DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output
from the player.
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
59 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see
page 80). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,
set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP
and then press
R
DISPLAY on the remote
control.
The following status screen appears in the OSD.
3 Press one of the sound field program
selector buttons (
U
) repeatedly to select the
desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
4 Press
D
k / n to select the desired sound
field parameter and then
D
l / h to change
the selected sound field parameter value.
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 61.
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the
sound field parameter name in the OSD.
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.
In this case, press
D
k / n to scroll through pages.
• If you press and hold
D
l / h to change the sound field
parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown
momentarily in the front panel display.
• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to
initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a
sound field program group (see page 80).
• You can select the amount of time that the current status is
displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in
“OPTION MENU” (see page 79).
5 Press
R
DISPLAY to turn off the sound field
parameter display.
Advanced sound configurations
Changing sound field parameter
settings
Note
NIGHT:OFF
A.SEL:HDMI
INPUT:DVD
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
STATUSVOL:-40.0dB
PARAMETER
MOVIE
. Sci-Fi 1/2
PROLOGIC
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;16ms
P.ROOM.SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;20ms
[RETURN]:STATUS
Cursor
60 En
Advanced sound configurations
■ Basic configuration of sound field
programs
y
To change sound field parameter settings, see page 59 for details.
Each sound field program has some parameters defining
the characteristics of the program. To customize the
selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/
or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound
field programs (DSP LEVEL)
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect
sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field
in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to
adjust the level of the effect sounds.
Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows:
Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when
• The effect sound of the selected sound field
program is too weak.
• You cannot recognize any difference between the
sound field programs.
Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when
• The sound is vague.
• You feel that the additional sound effect is
excessive.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position
(DIALG.LIFT)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is
at the center of the video monitor screen.
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video
monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the
highest position.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”
is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial
dialogue position.
The DSP effect
sound level is low.
The DSP effect sound
level is high.
Notes
The ideal
dialogue
position.
Move up to the ideal dialogue position.
61 En
Advanced sound configurations
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations
Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail.
y
To change sound field parameter settings, see page 59 for details.
Sound field parameter Features
INIT.DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INI.DLY
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the
apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the
first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to
the listener.
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding
room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP
programs.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
62 En
Advanced sound configurations
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB ROOM SIZE
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding
initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP
programs.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual
walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of
a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one
which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to
as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter
lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Sound field parameter Features
Level
Level
Level
Time Time Time
Source sound
Early
reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound source
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0 Large value = 10
63 En
Advanced sound configurations
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
REV.TIME
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
REV.DELAY
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
REV.LEVEL
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Sound field parameter Features
Reverberation
ReverberationSource sound
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early reflections
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
(dB)
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
Time
60 dB
Source sound
Level
REV. LEVEL
Time
64 En
Advanced sound configurations
■ Selecting decoders used with sound
field programs (Decoder Type)
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with
MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).
See page 45 for details about MOVIE sound field
program.
Available decoders
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-
channels.
Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP and
then press
U
SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the
remote control to select the desired surround
decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending on the
type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
y
You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press DISPLAY
and then
D
k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the
desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the
selected parameter by pressing
D
l / h repeatedly on the
remote control.
2ch Stereo
DIRECT
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only
when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 48).
• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry
when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the
subwoofer in the following cases:
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 70).
– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 71) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”
(see page 70).
7ch Stereo
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
PL LEVEL
PR LEVEL
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence
right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The
available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers.
Control range: 0 to 100%
2ch Enhancer
7ch Enhancer
2-channel and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals
of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.
Choices: HIGH, LOW
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
Sound field parameter Features
Decoder Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro
Logic II) processing for movie
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder
is not available when “SUR. B L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources
Selecting decoders
65 En
Advanced sound configurations
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Decoder descriptions
y
When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND
DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.
SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
SURROUND DECODE
PLIIx Movie
PL II Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when
“SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).
SURROUND DECODE
PLIIx Music
PL II Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when
“SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).
PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH
SURROUND DECODE
PLIIx Game
PL II Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when
“SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).
CENTER WIDTHDIMENSION
PLIIMusic
PLIIxMusic
SURROUND DECODE
PANORAMA
9
SUR.DECODE
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not
available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).
Available sound field parameters (see page 66)
Program description
Remote control
button
Name of the
program
Category of the
program
9
SUR.DECODE
9
SUR.DECODE
9
SUR.DECODE
9
SUR.DECODE
SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.
9
SUR.DECODE
SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
C. IMAGE
9
SUR.DECODE
66 En
Advanced sound configurations
Decoder parameter descriptions
Decoder parameter Features
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
PANORAMA
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
DIMENSION
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front
or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
CENTER WIDTH
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music
C.IMAGE
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
67 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 28).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover
frequency, and the assignment of the EXTRA SP terminal.
70
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
72
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the distance of each speaker.
73
D)EQUALIZER
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
73
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
74
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
74
G)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level.
74
H)HDMI SET
Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals.
75
I)EXTD SUR.
Selects the mode of the decoders for the 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
75
Parameter Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
76
B)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source.
77
C)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each input source.
78
D)DECODER MODE
Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear
panel of this unit.
78
E)MULTI CH SET
Sets the input channel numbers and other parameters of the input multi channel.
78
68 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Option menu 3 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 40).
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.
79
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.
80
C)AUDIO SELECT
Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources when you turn
on the power of this unit.
80
D)PARAM.INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
80
E)ZONE 2 SET
Adjusts the Zone 2 parameters.
80
F)DOCK SET
Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in
the standby mode.
81
69 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
• Press
E
RETURN to return to the previous menu level.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP
and then press
N
SET MENU to enter “SET
MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press
D
k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”
and then
D
ENTER to enter “MANUAL
SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
3 Press
D
k / n repeatedly and then press
D
ENTER to select and enter the desired
menu.
The following displays are examples where “SOUND
MENU” is selected.
4 Press
D
k / n repeatedly and then press
D
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
The following display is an example where “LFE
LEVEL” is selected.
5 Press
D
k / n to select the desired parameter
and then
D
l / h to change the parameter
settings.
6 Press
N
SET MENU to exit from “SET
MENU”.
Using SET MENU
SET MENU
.;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
MANUAL SETUP
. 1 SOUND MENU
2 INPUT MENU
3 OPTION MENU
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
MANUAL SETUP
1 SOUND MENU 1/2
. A)SPEAKER SET
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
C)SP DISTANCE
D)EQUALIZER
E)LFE LEVEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
MANUAL SETUP
1 SOUND MENU 2/2
. F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET
H)HDMI SET
I)EXTD SUR.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
SOUND MENU
E)LFE LEVEL
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
70 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU
parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO
SETUP (see page 28).
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
Extra speakers assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the
EXTRA SP terminals.
Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE
When you use the alternative front speaker
system (see page 38)
Select “FRONT B”.
When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see
page 96)
Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers to
the Zone 2 speakers.
When you use the presence speakers (see
page 12)
Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the speakers
to the presence speakers.
When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals
Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP
terminals.
• This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP
ASSIGN” parameter in “AUTO SETUP”.
• If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 101), you cannot
select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.
• After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out
“AUTO SETUP” again (see page 28).
FRONT B speakers setting FRONT B
The “FRONT B” parameter is available only when you set
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.
Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B
speakers.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on or off
when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main room.
• Select “ZONE B” if the FRONT B speakers are set in
another room. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B
is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer
in the main room are muted and this unit outputs sound
at the FRONT B terminals only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the
sound is output from both the headphones and the EXTRA SP
terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.
• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to
“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA
DSP mode (see page 46).
Presence/Surround back channel priority
PRIORITY
The “PRIORITY” parameter is available only when you
set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.
Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the
surround back speakers when playing sources that contain
surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP
sound field programs.
Choices: PRNS, SUR. B
• Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channels will be output from the
surround speakers.
• Select “SUR. B” to use the surround back speakers
when surround back channel signals are detected in a
CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals
are output from the front speakers.
1 SOUND MENU
Notes
MANUAL SETUP
1 SOUND MENU 1/2
. A)SPEAKER SET
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
C)SP DISTANCE
D)EQUALIZER
E)LFE LEVEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
MANUAL SETUP
1 SOUND MENU 2/2
. F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET
H)HDMI SET
I)EXTD SUR.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
SOUND MENU
. EXTRA SP ASSIGN
ZONE2 >FRONT B
PRESENCE NONE
FRONT B;;;;FRONT
PRIORITY;;;;;---
ZONE2 SET
Not Available
Notes
71 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
When the front speakers are large
Select “LARGE” (large).
When the front speakers are small
Select “SMALL” (small).
When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 70), you
can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of
“FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance,
this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the center speaker is large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the center speaker is small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the center speaker
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are
directed to the front left and right speakers.
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the surround speakers are large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the surround speakers are small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the surround speakers
Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46), and “SUR. B L/R
SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.
Surround back left/right speakers SUR. B L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2
When the surround back left and right
speakers are large
Select “LRGx2” (large x 2).
When the single surround back speaker is
large
Select “LRGx1” (large x 1).
When the surround back left and right
speakers are small
Select “SMLx2” (small x 2).
When the single surround back speaker is
small
Select “SMLx1” (small x 1).
When you do not use the surround back
speakers
Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel
signals are directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large
Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small
Note
SOUND MENU
FRONT SP
SMALL >LARGE
SOUND MENU
CENTER SP
NONE >SML LRG
SOUND MENU
SUR. L/R SP
NONE >SML LRG
SOUND MENU
SUR.B L/R SP
SMLx1 >SMLx2 LRGx1
72 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get natural bass sound
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well
as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get rich bass sound
Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of
any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE
signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to
the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front
left and right channels are directed to the front left and
right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting.
When you do not use a subwoofer
Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the
low-frequency signals of the front left and right
channels, and the low-frequency signals of other
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed
to the front left and right speakers regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting.
Bass crossover CROSSOVER
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see page 71). All frequencies below
the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to
the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER
SET” (see page 71).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each
speaker.
Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R
SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71).
SOUND MENU
LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR FRNT>BOTH
SOUND MENU
CROSSOVER
FREQ;;;80Hz
SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusted speaker
FL
Front left speaker
FR
Front right speaker
C
Center speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
SL
Surround left speaker
SR
Surround right speaker
SBR
Surround back right speaker
SBL
Surround back left speaker
PL
Presence left speaker
PR
Presence right speaker
Notes
SOUND MENU
SUBWOOFER PHASE
>NORMAL REVERSE
SOUND MENU
B)SPEAKER LEVEL 1/2
-
__________
+
. FL;;;;;;;;;;
FR;;;;;;;;;;
C;;;;;;;;;;
SWFR;;;;;;;;;;
73 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting:
FRONT L/FRONT R/CENTER/SWFR/SUR. L/SUR. R/
PRNS L/PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
SB L/SB R: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/
R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71).
■ Equalizer D)EQUALIZER
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the
graphic equalizer.
Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT
Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.
Choices: AUTO PEQ, CENTER GEQ, EQ OFF
• Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer
adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28).
• Select “CENTER GEQ” to adjust the built-in
5-frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal
quality of the center speaker matches that of the front
left and right speakers. Press
D
k / n to display the
graphic equalizer screen.
• Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature.
When you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 28),
“AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting.
Test tone TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”
while listening to a test tone.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
• Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and
front left speakers.
SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back left speaker
SB R
Surround back right speaker
PRNS L
Presence left speaker
PRNS R
Presence right speaker
Notes
SOUND MENU
C)SP DISTANCE 1/2
. UNIT;;;;;;meters
FRONT L;;;3.00m
FRONT R;;;3.00m
CENTER;;;;3.00m
SWFR;;;;;;3.00m
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
p
p
p
[
Note
SOUND MENU
D)EQUALIZER
EQ TYPE SELECT
. CENTER GEQ
[ ]/[]:CT GEQ
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
p
p
[
SOUND MENU
. TEST >OFF ON
-
______
+
100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
74 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ
Use to match the tonal quality of the center speaker with
that of the front left and right speakers. You can adjust 5
frequency bands (100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and
10 kHz).
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
y
Press
D
k / n to select a frequency band and
D
l / h to adjust
the selected frequency band.
The “CENTER GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when
“CENTER GEQ” is selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.
■ Low-frequency effect level
E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Speaker SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
jack.
■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
Speaker SP
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Headphone HP
Adjusts the headphone compression.
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Muting type MUTING TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 40).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay AUDIO DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Note
Note
SOUND MENU
TEST >OFF ON
-
______
+
. 100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
SOUND MENU
E)LFE LEVEL
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
SOUND MENU
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
. SP: MIN STD>MAX
HP: MIN STD>MAX
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
SOUND MENU
G)AUDIO SET
. MUTING TYPE;FULL
A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms
MAX VOL.;+16.5dB
INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
75 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected
loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume
range is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “MAX
VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes
–5.0 dB to –80.0 dB.
Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level
is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX
VOL.” setting.
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial
Volume” setting. For example, if “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB
and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of
this unit next time.
• Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume
level in Zone 2 (see page 81).
Initial volume INI VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone
when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”
setting.
• Use “INI VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume level
in Zone 2 (see page 81).
■ HDMI setting H)HDMI SET
Use this feature to select the component to play back
HDMI audio signals.
Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio
signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected
to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.
Choices: RX-V661, OTHER
• Select “RX-V661” to play back HDMI audio signals
on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the
HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the
rear panel of this unit.
• Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack
of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
■ Extended surround decoders
I)EXTD SUR.
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders by using the
connected surround back speakers.
Mode MODE
Use this feature to select the mode of the decoder driving.
Choices: AUTO, ON, OFF
• Select “AUTO” to activate the optimum decoder to
play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels when a signal
flag that can be recognized by this unit is input.
• Select “ON” to play back multi-channel sources using
the selected decoder type in “TYPE”.
• Select “OFF” not to use the decoders to create 6.1/7.1
channels.
Decoder type TYPE
Use this feature to select the decoders used to play back
multi-channel sources when you select “ON” in “MODE”.
Choices: PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, EX
• Select “PLIIxMovie” to play back Dolby Digital or
DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx
movie decoder.
• Select “PLIIx Music” to play back Dolby Digital or
DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx
music decoder.
• Select “EX/ES” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX
or DTS-ES decoder.
• Select “EX” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX
decoder.
Notes
Notes
SOUND MENU
H)HDMI SET
SUPPORT AUDIO:
RX-V661
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
[ENTER]:Return
Note
SOUND MENU
I)EXTD SUR.
. MODE;;;;;;;;AUTO
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
SOUND MENU
I)EXTD SUR.
. MODE;;;;;;;;;;ON
TYPE;;;PL xMovieII
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
76 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
y
Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when
this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources
correctly.
• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the
speakers and the input sources.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:
– when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 71) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see
page 71) is set to “NONE”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when the stereo playback, Compressed Music Enhancer (see
page 46) or Pure Direct (see page 48) mode is selected.
– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 101).
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to
“AUTO”.
Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the
input mode or rename the input source.
■ Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
y
The input source name in parentheses indicates the default
assigned input source.
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C
CMPNT-V INPUT
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR
[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR
Notes
2 INPUT MENU
MANUAL SETUP
2 INPUT MENU
. A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
B)INPUT RENAME
C)VOLUME TRIM
D)DECODER MODE
E)MULTI CH SET
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
INPUT MENU
CMPNT-V INPUT
. [A];;;;; DVD
( DVD )
[B];;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL))
[C];;;;; DVR
( DVR )
77 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1
OPTICAL OUT
Choices: (1) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, VCR, DVR
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4
OPTICAL IN
Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
DVR, VCR
(3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
DVR, VCR
(4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
DVR, VCR
For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 COAXIAL IN
Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DVR, VCR
(6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DVR, VCR
For HDMI IN jacks 1 and 2 HDMI IN
Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR
[IN2] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR
■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
y
• This feature is useful when you change the input or output
assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.
• You can only rename DOCK when iPod is stationed in the
Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons (
B
)
on the remote control to select the input
source you want to change the name of.
2 Press
D
l / h to place the “_” (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
3 Press
D
k / n to select the character you
want to use and then press
D
l / h to move
to the next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
•Press
D
n to change the character in the following order,
or press
D
k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press
D
ENTER on the remote control to exit
from “INPUT RENAME”.
Notes
INPUT MENU
OPTICAL OUT
. (1);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R )
INPUT MENU
OPTICAL IN
. (2);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R )
(3);;;;; DVD
( DVD )
(4);;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL )
INPUT MENU
COAXIAL IN
. (5);;;;; CD
(CD)
(6);;;;; DVD
( DVD )
(4);;;;;DTV/CBLTA
Notes
INPUT MENU
HDMI IN
. [IN1];;; DVD
( DVD )
[IN2];;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL))
INPUT MENU
B)INPUT RENAME
DVD -> MY DVD
[ ]/[ ]:Position
[ ]/[ ]:Chara.
p
p
[
[
78 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the output level of each input
source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: TUNER, PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/
CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX, DOCK, MULTI CH
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
y
• You can adjust the value for DOCK only when iPod is stationed
to the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.
• The default name (“DVD” in the display example above) and
the new name (“MY DVD”) of the selected input source
appears in the OSD.
■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Decoder select mode
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for
the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks
when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to
automatically detect the type of input signals and select
the appropriate decoder mode.
• Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder mode used for the connected
input source.
DTS decoder prioritize setting
Choices: AUTO, DTS
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the
input mode.
■ Multi channel input settings
E)MULTI CH SET
Use this feature to set the function of the multi channel
input.
BGV BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR, LAST,
OFF
• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select
the last selected video source as the background video
source.
• Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video
source in the background.
Input channels INPUT CH
Use this setting to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6CH, 8CH
• Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals.
• Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals.
Front input FRONT
If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the
analog jacks at which the front signals from an external
decoder will be input.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR, VCR
y
See page 22 for the connection information.
The “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT
CH” to “8CH”.
INPUT MENU
C)VOLUME TRIM
MY DVD
DVD -> 0.0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
[RETURN]:Exit
[
[
INPUT MENU
D)DECODER MODE 1/2
. >AUTO LAST
CD ;;;;AUTO
MD/CD-R ;;;;AUTO
DVD ;;;;AUTO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
p
[
[
Note
INPUT MENU
E)MULTI CH SET
. BGV;;;;; LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;6CH
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
p
[
[
INPUT MENU
E)MULTI CH SET
. BGV;;;;; LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;8CH
FRONT;;; DVD
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
p
[
[
79 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: –
4 to 0
Control step: 1
•Press
D
l to make the front panel display dimmer.
•Press
D
h to make the front panel display brighter.
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and
component video signals interchangeably.
• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.
• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a
game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals
even if you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
• Press
D
l to raise the position of the OSD.
• Press
D
h to lower the position of the OSD.
Source feature OSD display time
OSD-SOURCE
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain
operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
• Select “ON” to display the OSD continuously during
an operation.
• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Amplifier function OSD display time
OSD-AMP
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
status and sound field parameters information screen after
you perform a certain operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
• Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an
operation.
• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Use this feature to set whether to display the information
(such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once
when “DOCK” is selected as the input source.
Choices: CONT, ONCE
• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
3 OPTION MENU
Notes
MANUAL SETUP
3 OPTION MENU 1/2
p
p
. A)DISPLAY SET
B)MEMORY GUARD
C)AUDIO SELECT
D)PARAM. INI
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
MANUAL SETUP
3 OPTION MENU 2/2
p
p
. E)ZONE2 SET
F)DOCK SET
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
OPTION MENU
A)DISPLAY SET 1/2
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
VIDEO CONV.;;;ON
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
p
[
[
OPTION MENU
A)DISPLAY SET 2/2
. OSD-SOURCE;;;30s
OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s
FL SCROLL;;;CONT
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
p
[
[
80 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”
feature.
• Select “ON” to protect:
– sound field program parameters
– all “SET MENU” items
– all speaker levels
– SCENE template parameters
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.
■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting for the input sources when you turn on the
power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate audio input jack select setting.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last audio input jack select setting used for
the connected input source.
■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM.INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
factory settings.
Press the corresponding sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control to select the sound
field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field
program names that have been changed from their initial
factory settings.
Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB,
ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO,
ENHANCER, SUR. DECODE
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”.
■ Zone 2 settings E)ZONE2 SET
Zone 2 Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
Zone 2.
Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”
setting. For example, when “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and
then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of
this unit next time.
• The “MAX VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the
“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.
Note
OPTION MENU
B)MEMORY GUARD
>OFF ON
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
[
[
OPTION MENU
C)AUDIO SELECT
>AUTO LAST
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
[
[
Notes
Notes
OPTION MENU
D)PARAM. INI
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
*ENTERTAINMENT
*MOVIE
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
ENHANCER
Press DSP Key
OPTION MENU
E)ZONE2 SET
. MAX VOL.;+16.5dB
INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
p
[
[
81 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Zone 2 Initial volume INI VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 when the
power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”
setting.
• When you select “FRONT B”, “PRNS” or “NONE” in
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 70), “Zone 2 SP Not
Assigned” appears in the OSD and the “ZONE2 SET”
parameter is not available.
• The “INI VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the
ZONE 2 OUT jacks.
■ iPod universal dock setting F)DOCK SET
Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode (see page 56).
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed
iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby
mode.
• Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed
iPod only when this unit is turned on.
Notes
OPTION MENU
F)DOCK SET
STANDBY CHARGE:
AUTO
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
[
[
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
82 En
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 85).
■ Controlling the input source
components in the SCENE mode
You can operate both this unit and the input source
component by using the remote control. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
advance (see page 85).
1 Press the desired
A
SCENE button on the
remote control.
2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below
to control the input source component of the
selected SCENE template.
*
These buttons control the input source component. See page 84
for details of the function of each button.
■ Setting the input source of the
customized SCENE template on the
remote control
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE
template on the remote control to operate the input source
component correctly.
1 Press and hold the
A
SCENE button and the
desired input selector button (
A
).
The transmit indicator (
X
) flashes twice.
2 Keep holding down the buttons pressed in
step 2 until “OK” appears in the display
window (J) on the remote control.
If the setting of the input source is not successful, “NG”
appears in the display window (
J
). In this case, repeat the
setting procedure.
Remote control features
Using the remote control for the SCENE feature
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
1234
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
B
A
N
D
LEVEL
SLEEP
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
*
Set to
SOURCE
SCENE
buttons
Note
83 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Controlling this unit
Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP to control this
unit.
*1
These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when the component
operation mode selector is set to
L
AMP.
■ Controlling a TV
Set the operation mode selector to
L
TV to control your
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate
remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO (see
page 85). When you set the remote control codes for both
DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for
DTV/CBL.
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to
L
TV. For details, see the “TV” column on
page 84.
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
1234
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START
VOLUME
TV VOL
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
B
AND
LEVEL
SLEEP
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
TV CH
*1
*2
*1
*1
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER Turns on or off the power.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.
TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT Changes the input source.
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
1234
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
B
AN
D
LEVEL
SLEEP
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
*1
*1
*2
*2
84 En
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
Set the operation mode selector to
L
SOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons
(B), or . You must set the appropriate remote
control code for each input source in advance (see
page 85). The following table shows the function of each
control button used to control other components assigned
to each input selector button (B), or . Be advised
that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected
component.
y
The remote control has 12 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 12
different components.
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons operate your VCR or DVR when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 85).
*3
Press and hold to search backward or forward.
*4
Simple remote mode (see page 56).
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
AV
TV
1234
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
FREQ/TEXT EON MODE-PTY SEEK- START
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
SLEEP
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
0
8
7
DVD player/
DVD
recorder
VCR
Cable TV/
Satellite
tuner
TV LD player CD player
MD recorder/
CD recorder
Tape deck Tuner iPod
1 AV P OW E R
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
VCR power
*2
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
2 TITLE
Title Title Title Title Band
3 ENTER
Menu enter Menu select Menu select
Subsequent
menu
PRESET/CH k Menu up Menu up Menu up
Preset up
(1 to 8)
Up
PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Menu down
Preset down
(1 to 8)
Down
A/B/C/D/E l Menu left Menu left Menu left
Preset down
(A to E)
Previous
menu
A/B/C/D/E h Menu right Menu right Menu right Direction A/B
Preset up
(A to E)
Subsequent
menu
4 RETURN
Return Return Return Return
5 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
6 ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
DVR search
backward
*2
DVR search
backward
*2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
*3
hh
Search
forward
Search
forward
DVR search
forward
*2
DVR search
forward
*2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
*3
b
Skip
backward
DVR skip
backward
DVR skip
backward
Chapter/Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Direction
back
Skip
backward
a Skip forward
DVR skip
forward
DVR skip
forward
Chapter/Skip
forward
Skip forward Skip forward
Direction
forward
Skip
forward
REC/
DISC SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
DVR rec
*2
DVR rec
*2
Disc skip Rec Rec
s Stop Stop
DVR stop
*2
DVR stop
*2
Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop
e Pause Pause
DVR pause
*2
DVR pause
*2
Pause Pause Pause Pause
Pause
(Play/Pause)
*4
p Play Play
DVR play
*2
DVR play
*2
Play Play Play Play
Play
(Play/Pause)
*4
7 MENU
Menu Menu Menu
Previous
menu
8 AUDIO
Audio Audio
0 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
A ENT
Enter Enter/recall Enter
Notes
85 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Selecting a component to be controlled
You can select a component to be controlled
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons.
Press
J
SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the
desired component.
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the
display window (
J
) on the remote control.
■ Controlling optional components
(Option mode)
“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be
programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for
programming commands that are to be used only as a part
of a macro function or for components that do not have a
valid remote control code.
To select the option mode, press
J
SELECT k /
n repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display
window (
J
) on the remote control.
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See
page 87 to program buttons operated within this component
control area.
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at
the end of this manual.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.
Remote control code default settings
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a
YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button (
B
),
or
to select the input area
you want to set up.
Note
SELECT
SELECT
Setting remote control codes
Input area
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
PHONO TV – –
MULCH CH
IN
DVD YAMAHA 2100
LD YAMAHA 2200
TAPE YAMAHA 2700
V-AU X/
DOCK
TUNER YAMAHA 2606
TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602
MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400
CD CD YAMAHA 2300
DTV/CBL TV – –
DVR DVR YAMAHA 2807
VCR VCR – –
DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL
DVR VCR
DVD
MD/CD-R
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
TV
SOURCE
AMP
86 En
Remote control features
2 Press and hold
T
LEARN for about 3
seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the
selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in
the display window (
J
) on the remote control.
y
• You can set a remote control code of a different type of
component to an input area. Press
D
l / h repeatedly to
change the library (component category).
Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,
L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),
L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),
L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR
• If you want to setup for another input area, press the input
selector button, or , or press
J
SELECT k / n
repeatedly to select the input area.
• Be sure to press and hold
T
LEARN for at least 3
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
3 Press
D
ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window (
J
).
“0000” appears in the display window (
J
) if no code has
been set.
4 Press the numeric buttons (
F
) to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the
component you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of
this manual.
5 Press
D
ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control if setting was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this
case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button (
B
) or , or
J
SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then
repeat steps 2 through 5.
6 Press
T
LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether
you can control your component using the
remote control.
y
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your
component has more than one code, try each of them until
you find the correct one.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (
J
) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the learn feature (see “Programming
codes from other remote controls” on page 87) or use the
remote control supplied with the component.
• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.
Notes
Note
LEARN
Notes
4
3
2
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
LEARN
AV
POWER
or
87 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program
functions not included in the basic operations covered by
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control
code is not available. You can program the function of
other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas
in the following illustration. The buttons can be
programmed independently for each input area.
The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the
operating instructions for the other remote control.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button(B), or to select a an input area.
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to
L
SOURCE. When you set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP and program a remote control codes from other remote
controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier
function of this unit.
2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other.
3 Press
T
LEARN using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“LEARN” and the name of the selected input area
(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window
(
J
) on the remote control.
• Do not press and hold
T
LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.
4 Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” appears in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control.
Programming codes from other
remote controls
Note
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
AV
TV
1234
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
SLEEP
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
1234
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
5 to 10 cm
Other remote control
LEARN
88 En
Remote control features
5 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window (
J
) on
the remote control.
“NG” appears in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this
case, start over from step 4.
y
• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4
and 5.
• If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press
J
SELECT k / n to select the
component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.
6 Press
T
LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– when the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each
other at the appropriate angle.
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
You can change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window (
J
) on the remote control if you
want to use a different name than the factory preset. This
feature is useful when you have set an input area to control
a different component.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP or
L
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button (B), or to select the input area
you want to rename.
The name of the selected input area appears in the
display window (
J
).
2 Press
T
RENAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from step 2.
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
1234
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
Other remote control
LEARN
Changing source names in the
display window
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL
DVR VCR
DVD
MD/CD-R
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
RENAME
89 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
3 Press
D
k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing
D
n changes the character as follows:
A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),
/ (slash), and space.
Pressing
D
k changes the characters in reverse order.
4 Press
D
h to move the cursor to the next
position.
y
Press
D
l to move the cursor to the previous position.
5 Press
D
ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control if renaming was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window(
J
) on the
remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this
case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to rename another input area, press
the input selector button (
B
), , or , or press
J
SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then
repeat steps 3 through 5.
6 Press RENAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
“ERROR” appears in the display window (
J
) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
y
This feature is useful when you change the input or output
assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.
Refer to “Input rename” on page 77.
The macro programming feature makes it possible to
perform a series of operations with the press of a single
button. For example, when you want to play a CD,
normally you would turn on the components, select the
CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The
macro programming feature lets you perform all of these
operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with
macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 91).
■ MACRO operations
1 Set the
T
MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.
2 Press the desired macro button.
3 Set the
T
MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF
when you finish to using the macro
programming operation.
• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does
not accept any other operation until it has completed running
the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
Note
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
RENAME
Macro programming features
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
1234
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START
Macro buttons
MACRO ON/OFF MACRO
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
MACRO
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
MACRO
90 En
Remote control features
■ Default macro functions
*1
You can turn on some components (including Yamaha components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLETS
on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.
*2
When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 85), you can turn on the power of your
TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV/CBL takes priority over the one for PHONO.
*3
When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
*4
Playback can be started for any Yamaha remote control-compatible CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When
using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that component (see
page 87) or set a remote control code (see page 85).
Pressing
macro button
To automatically transmit these signals in order
First Second Third
—
—
—
(*1)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(MD/CD-R area) (*4)
(CD area) (*4)
—
(DVR area) (*4)
(VCR area) (*4)
(DVD area) (*4)
STANDBY STANDBY
POWER
POWER
(*1)
TV
POWER
(*2)
PHONO
POWER
PHONO
MULCH CH IN
MULCH CH IN
V
-
AUX/DOC
K
V
-
AUX/DOC
K
TUNE
R
TUNE
R
(*3)
MD/CD-
R
MD/CD-
R
CD CD
DTV/CBL DTV/CBL
DVR DVR
VCR VCR
DVD DVD
91 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Programming macro operations
You can program your own macro and use the macro
programming feature to transmit several remote control
commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to
set up remote control codes or perform learning operations
before programming the macro.
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
• We do not recommend programming continuous operations
such as volume control in a macro.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP or
L
SOURCE and then press
T
MACRO using
a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
2 Press the macro button you want to use to
operate the macro.
The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the
selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear
alternately in the display window (
J
) on the remote
control.
“AGAIN” appears in the display window (
J
) if you press a
button other than a macro button.
3 Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode. The
following example is for programming the following
procedure:
Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press POWER.
Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press DVD.
Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press STRAIGHT.
To change the selected input area, press
J
SELECT k / n
.
Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,
whereas
J
SELECT k / n
only changes the selected input
area.
4 Press
T
MACRO again using a ballpoint pen
or similar object when the operation
sequence you want to program is complete.
“ERROR” appears in the display window (
J
) if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
Notes
Note
MACRO
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
STANDBY
Note
Note
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
1234
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
RETURN
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
2
3
1
Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered
Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step
MCR 2: DVD
MCR 1: POWER
MCR 3: STRAIGHT
92 En
Remote control features
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names
and setup remote control ID.
■ Clearing function sets
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP or
L
SOURCE and then press
T
CLEAR by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“CLEAR” appears in the display window (
J
).
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from step 1.
2 Press
D
k / n to select the clear mode.
L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
input area. The name of a component is shown
after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector
button to select the input area.
L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the
amplifier functions of this unit.
L;ALL Clears all learned functions.
M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the
remote to the factory settings.
3 Press and hold
T
CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“WAIT” appears in the display window (
J
). If
clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the
display window (
J
) on the remote control.
y
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting, if you have set remote control codes).
• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to
complete.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window (
J
) if clearing
was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (
J
) if you press
a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
Clearing configurations
Note
CLEAR
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
Notes
CLEAR
93 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP or
L
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button(B), or to select the input area
containing the function you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window (J).
2 Press
T
CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name
(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window
(
J
).
• Do not press and hold
T
LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
3 Press and hold
T
CLEAR using a ballpoint
pen or similar object and then press the
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window (
J
) if
clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the
display window (
J
) on the remote control, release
the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press
T
CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote
control returns to the learning mode.
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 3.
• If you continuously want to clear another function for
another component, press
J
SELECT k / n to select the
input area, then repeat step 3.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
4 Press
T
LEARN again to exit.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window (
J
) on the remote
control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over
from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control if you press more than one button
simultaneously.
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
LEARN
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MODE- PTY SEEK-START
94 En
Remote control features
■ Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP or
L
SOURCE and then press
T
MACRO using
a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
2 Press and hold
T
CLEAR using a ballpoint
pen or similar object, then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control if clearing was successful.
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 2.
• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).
3 Press
T
MACRO again to exit the macro
programming mode.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window (
J
) on the remote
control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from
step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (
J
) on the remote
control if you press more than one button simultaneously.
Note
MACRO
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
Notes
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
95 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce
separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone
using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the
infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to
use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.
■ Using the external amplifier
Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows.
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
Using multi-zone configuration
Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be
connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connecting Zone 2
Note
OUTOUT
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
OUT
IN
REMOTE
REMOTE
This unit
Yamaha
component
Yamaha
component
Infrared signal
receiver
Infrared signal emitter
DVD player
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal receiver
Second zone
(Zone 2)
Main zone
This unit
From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks
From the REMOTE OUT jacks
From the REMOTE IN jacks
96 En
Using multi-zone configuration
■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit
Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals and then set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to
“ZONE2” (see page 70).
y
• You can use the FRONT B speakers as the front speaker system of another zone. Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B” and then
“FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 70).
• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone 2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume level and
maximum volume level of the Zone 2 speakers (see page 80).
You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control
buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are as follows:
• Selecting the input source of Zone 2
• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source of Zone 2 (see page 50)
• Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source
(see page 56)
You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is
flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is
automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal
operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection
procedure.
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel
Turning on Zone 2
Press
8
ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2.
y
8
ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when
B
MASTER
ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
Once
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward
to the ON position, you can also press
I
POWER or
H
STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone and
Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode.
Activating the Zone 2 operation mode
Press
9
ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.
The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for
approximately 10 seconds.
Important safety notice
The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
Controlling Zone 2
FRONT B/ZONE2/
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
L
R
Second zone
(Zone 2)
This unit
Main zone
Note
ZONE2
Flashes
97 En
Using multi-zone configuration
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Operating Zone 2
Rotate the
I
INPUT selector to select the
desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator
is flashing in the front panel display.
• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER
features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER
operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 50.
• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod
features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod
operations, see “Using iPod™” on page 56.
y
You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected
zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently
selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press
9
ZONE CONTROL on the front panel again.
Set Zone 2 to the standby mode
Press
8
ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the
standby mode.
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote
control
Activating the Zone 2 operation mode
Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP and
then press
J
SELECT k repeatedly to select the
zone you want to control.
“ZONE 2” is displayed in the display window (
J
) on the
remote control.
Turning on or off Zone 2 using the remote control
I
POWER and
H
STANDBY on the remote control
work differently depending on the selected zone that
appears in the display window (
J
) on the remote control.
• When the main zone, Zone 2 mode is selected, you can
turn on the main zone or Zone 2 or set them to the
standby mode individually.
• When the all mode is selected, pressing
I
POWER
turns on the main zone and Zone 2 simultaneously and
pressing
H
STANDBY sets them to the standby mode
simultaneously.
• When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN”
appears for a few seconds when
I
POWER or
H
STANDBY
is pressed.
• “ALL” appears in the display window (J) on the remote
control only when SELECT n is pressed.
Selecting the input source of Zone 2
Press one of the input selector buttons (
B
) to
select the input source of the selected zone.
If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2;
name of the selected input area” is displayed in the display
window (
J
) on the remote control when Zone 2 is
selected respectively.
The selected input source is shared across all zones.
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2
operation mode.
SELECT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Control mode
Display window
(J)
POWER
and
STANDBY
Main zone
mode
Name of the selected
input area
Turns on the main
zone only or sets it to
the standby mode.
Zone 2 mode
“ZONE 2” or “2;name
of the selected input
area”
Turns on Zone 2 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
All mode
“ALL”
I
POWER: turns
on the main zone and
Zone 2.
H
STANDBY: sets
the main zone and
Zone 2 to the standby
mode.
Notes
Note
ADVANCED SETUP
98 En
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see
page 25).
•Only
B
MASTER ON/OFF,
C
TONE CONTROL and the
D
PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced
setup menu.
• No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
1 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front
panel to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
2 Press and hold
C
TONE CONTROL and
then press
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the
D
PROGRAM selector to select
the parameter you want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
See page 99 for a complete list of available
parameters.
4 Press
C
TONE CONTROL repeatedly to
change the selected parameter setting.
5 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to save the new
setting and turn off this unit.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on
this unit.
Advanced setup
Notes
Using the advanced setup
TONE CONTROL
MASTER
ON
OFF
While holding
down
SPIMP.-8MIN
Currently selected
parameter setting
Currently selected
parameter
99 En
Advanced setup
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN
•Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
*
The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems
(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8Ω MIN”.
■ User presets PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 109).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition. This feature is useful when you
operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/
amplifiers in the same room separately.
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is
set to “2001”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is
set to “2002”.
Setting remote control AMP ID codes
You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the
remote control.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
L
AMP or
L
SOURCE.
2 Press and hold
T
LEARN for about 3
seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar
object and then press
D
l / h repeatedly
until “L;AMP” appears in the display window
(
J
) on the remote control.
• Be sure to press and hold
T
LEARN for at least 3
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
3 Press
D
ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected input area
appears in the display window (
J
) on the remote
control.
See page 98 for the operation of the advanced setup.
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
8Ω MIN
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 Ω or
higher.
*
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
6Ω MIN
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
Notes
Notes
LEARN
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ii
APPENDIX
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen
Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
1234
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
B
AND
LEVEL
SLEEP
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
4
3
2
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
A
B
C
D
F
G
H
I
K
L
J
M
N
O
P
Q
T
R
S
U
VW
E
XY
iii
List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
Список кодов дистанционного управления
CABLE
ABC 0030, 0035
AMERICAST 0926
BELL SOUTH 0926
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
0303
BRITISH TELECOM
0030
CABLE & WIRELESS
1095
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
DIRECTOR 0503
FILMNET 0470
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837,
GOLDSTAR 0171
HAMLIN 0036, 0300
JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,
0837
LG 0171
MNET 0470
MEMOREX 0027
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,
1133
NTL 1095
NOOS 0844
ONO 1095
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
0030
PACE 0264, 1087, 1095
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134
PARAGON 0027
PHILIPS 0332, 0344
PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,
1904
PULSAR 0027
QUASAR 0027
REGAL 0300, 0306
RUNCO 0027
SAGEM 0844
SAMSUNG 0027, 0171
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
SONY 1033
STARCOM 0030
SUPERCABLE
0303
TS 0030
TELE+1 0470
TELEWEST 1095
TORX 0030
TOSHIBA 0027
TRANS PX 0303
UNITED CABLE
0030
ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926
CD PLAYER
AIWA 0184
ARCAM 0184
AUDIO RESEARCH
0184
AUDIO TON 0184
AUDIOLAB 0184
AUDIOMECA 0184
CAIRN 0184
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
0056
CARVER 0184, 0206
CYRUS 0184
DKK 0027
DMX ELECTRONICS
0184
DENON 0900
DYNAMIC BASS
0206
EMERSON 0332
FISHER 0206
GENEXXA 0059, 0332
GOODMANS 0332
GRUNDIG 0184
HARMAN/KARDON
0184, 0200
HITACHI 0059
JVC 0099
KENWOOD 0055, 0064
KRELL 0184
LXI 0332
LINN 0184
MCS 0056
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332
MARANTZ 0056, 0184
MATSUI 0184
MEMOREX 0332
MERIDIAN 0184
MICROMEGA 0184
MIRO 0027
MISSION 0184
MYRYAD 0184
NAD 0027
NSM 0184
NAIM 0184
OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,
0206, 0332
PANASONIC 0056
PHILIPS 0184
PIONEER 0059, 0332
POLK AUDIO 0184
PROTON 0184
QED 0184
QUAD 0184
QUASAR 0056
RCA 0059, 0206, 0332
REALISTIC 0206
REVOX 0184
ROTEL 0184
SAE 0184
SANSUI 0184, 0332
SANYO 0206
SCOTT 0332
SEARS 0332
SHARP 0064
SIMAUDIO 0184
SONIC FRONTIERS
0184
SONY 0027
SYMPHONIC 0332
TAG MCLAREN
0184
TANDY 0059
TECHNICS 0056
THORENS 0184
THULE 0184
UNIVERSUM 0184
VICTOR 0099
WARDS 0184
YAMAHA 2300, 2301
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0653
MARANTZ 0653
PHILIPS 0653
YAMAHA 2400
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
0757
ALBA 0744
AMSTRAD 0740
APEX DIGITAL
0699, 0744, 0782,
0821, 0823, 0857,
1127
BLAUPINKT 0744
BLUE PARADE
0598
BUSH 0740
CENTREX 0699
CLATRONIC 0815
CYBERHOME
0741
DVD2000 0548
DAEWOO 0811, 0797
DANSAI 0797
DECCA 0797
DENON 0517
DIAMOND 0795
DIGITREX 0699
EMERSON 0618
ENTERPRISE 0618
FISHER 0697
GE 0549, 0744
GO VIDEO 0742
GOLDSTAR 0768
GRADIENTE 0678
GREENHILL 0744
GRUNDIG 0566
HITACHI 0600, 0691
HITEKER 0699
JVC 0585, 0650
KLH 0744
KENWOOD 0517, 0561
KOSS 0678
LG 0768
LIMIT 0795
MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702
MARANTZ 0566
MEMOREX 0858
MICO 0750
MICROSOFT 0549
MINTEK 0744
MITSUBISHI 0548
MUSTEK 0757
NESA 0744
ONKYO 0530
ORITRON 0678
PALSONIC 0699
PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389
PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,
0881
PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,
0659
POLK AUDIO 0566
PROSCAN 0549
QWESTAR 0678
RCA 0549, 0598, 0744
ROTEL 0650
SM ELECTRONIC
0757
SAMSUNG 0600
SANYO 0697
SHARP 0657
SHERWOOD 0797
SHINSONIC 0560
SLIM ART 0811
SONY 0560, 0891
SYLVANIA 0702
TATUNG 0797
TEAC 0598, 0744
TECHNICS 0517
THETA DIGITAL
0598
THOMSON 0549
TOSHIBA 0530
URBAN CONCEPTS
0530
XBOX 0549
YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,
2100
ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768
ZEUS 0811
DVD RECORDER
HITACHI 2815
PANASONIC 2800
PHILIPS 2808
PIONEER 2804
TOSHIBA 2803
YAMAHA 2807
iv
APPENDIX
LD PLAYER
CARVER 0091
DENON 0086
MARANTZ 0091
MITSUBISHI 0086
NAD 0086
NAGSMI 0086
OPTIMUS 0086
PHILIPS 0091
PIONEER 0086
SALORA 0091
SONY 0228
TELEFUNKEN
0086
YAMAHA 2200
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0708
ONKYO 0895
SHARP 0888
SONY 0517
YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC 0558
AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,
1432, 1668
ALCO 1417
ANAM 1636
APEX DIGITAL
1284
AUDIOLAB 1216
AUDIOTRONIC
1216
AUDIOVOX 1417
BOSE 1256
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
1397
CAPETRONIC
0558
CARVER 1116, 1216
CENTREX 1284
DENON 1387
FERGUSON 0558
FINE ARTS 1216
GRUNDIG 1216
HARMAN/KARDON
0137, 1331
INTEGRA 0162, 1325
JBL 0137, 1333
JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,
1522
KLH 1417, 1439
KENWOOD 1054, 1340
MCS 0066
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,
1296,
MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,
1316
MICROMEGA 1216
MUSICMAGIC
1116
MYRYAD 1216
NAD 0347
NORCENT 1416
ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325
OPTIMUS 0558, 1050
PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,
1790
PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,
1295, 1296, 1310,
1316
PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,
1411
POLK AUDIO 1316
PROSCAN 1281
QUASAR 0066
RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,
1417, 1636,
SABA 0558
SANSUI 1116
SCHNEIDER 0558
SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,
1685, 1785
STEREOPHONICS
1050
SUNFIRE 1340
TEAC 1417
TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,
1545
TELEFUNKEN
0558
THOMSON 1281
THORENS 1216
UHER 0558
VENTURER 1417
VICTOR 0101
WARDS 0041, 0185
YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,
2601
(TUNER ID1) 2602
(TUNER ID2) 2603
(iPod) 2606
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT 1327
ABSAT 0150
ALBA 0482
ALPHASTAR 0799
AMSTRAD 0874
ASTON 0169, 1156
ASTRO 0200
ATSAT 1327
AVALON 0423
BLAUPUNKT 0200
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
0874, 1202
CANAL DIGITAL
0880
CANAL SATELLITE
0880
CANAL+ 0880
CHAPARRAL 0243
CITYCOM 1203
CONNEXIONS
0423
CROSSDIGITAL
1136
CYRUS 0227
D-BOX 0750, 1154
DMT 1102
DNT 0227, 0423
DAERYUNG 0423
DAEWOO 1323
DIGENIUS 0326
DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,
0666, 0751, 0776,
0846, 1103, 1136,
1169, 1776, 1883
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
0802, 1032
DISHPRO 0802, 1032
DISTRATEL 0111
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
1264
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,
0802, 0880, 0898,
1032, 1113
ENGEL 1044
EXPRESSVU 0802
FTE 0890
FINLUX 0482
FRACARRO 0898
FUBA 0423
GE 0593
GOI 0802
GALAXIS 0890, 1138
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0896
GOLD BOX 0880
GRUNDIG 0200, 0874
HTS 0802
HIRSCHMANN
0200, 0423
HITACHI 0482, 0846
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
0776, 1169, 1776
HUMAX 0890, 1203
INVIDEO 0898
JVC 0802
KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,
0276, 0685, 1248
KREISELMEYER
0200
LABGEAR 1323
LOGIX 1044
LORENZEN 0326
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751
MANHATTAN
0482, 1044, 1110
MARANTZ 0227
MEDIASAT 0880
MEMOREX 0751
METRONIC 0111
MITSUBISHI 0776
MOTOROLA 0896
MYRYAD 0227
NEXT LEVEL 0896
NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,
1154, 1250, 1750
OCTALTV 1032
ORBITECH 1127
PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,
1350
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,
1347
PANDA 0482
PAYSAT 0751
PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,
0749, 0751, 0776,
0880, 1103, 1169,
1776
PIONEER 0880
PROMAX 0482
PROSCAN 0419, 0593
RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,
0882
RFT 0227
RADIOSHACK
0896
RADIOLA 0227
RADIX 0423
SKY 0874, 0883, 1202
SM ELECTRONIC
1227
SABRE 0482
SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280
SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,
1319
SAT CONTROL
1327
SATSTATION 1110
SCHWAIGER 1138
SEEMANN 0423
SIEMENS 0200
SONY 0666, 0874, 1666
STAR CHOICE
0896
STRONG 1327
TPS 0847, 1280
TANTEC 0482
TECHNISAT 1126, 1127
TELESTAR 1127
THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,
1318
TOPFIELD 1233
TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776
ULTIMATETV
0419, 0666
UNIDEN 0749, 0751
UNIVERSUM 0200
VENTANA 0227
WISI 0200, 0423, 0482
XSAT 0150
ZEHNDER 1102
ZENITH 0883, 1883
TAPE DECK
AIWA 0056
CARVER 0056
GRUNDIG 0056
HARMAN/KARDON
0056
MAGNAVOX 0056
MARANTZ 0056
MYRYAD 0056
OPTIMUS 0054
PHILIPS 0056
PIONEER 0054
POLK AUDIO 0056
RCA 0054
REVOX 0056
SANSUI 0056
SONY 0270
THORENS 0056
WARDS 0054
YAMAHA 2700,2701
TV
AGB 0543
AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,
0119, 0120, 0135,
0205, 0207, 0478
ASA 0131
AWA 0036
ACURA 0036
ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680
ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490
ADVENT 0788
AIKO 0119
AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,
0388, 0543, 0729,
0839
AKURA 0291
ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,
0695
v
AMERICA ACTION 0207
AMPRO 0778
AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,
0398, 0439, 0460,
0543
ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277
ANAM NATIONAL
0277, 0677
ANITECH 0036
APEX DIGITAL
0775, 0792, 0794
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136
BANG & OLUFSEN
0592
BASIC 0036
BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539
BAYSONIC 0207
BEAUMARK 0205
BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,
0742
BELL & HOWELL
0181
BEON 0064
BLAUPUNKT 0222
BLUE SKY 0695, 1064
BONDSTEC 0274
BRADFORD 0207
BRANDT 0136, 0362
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490
BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,
0401, 0695, 1064
CCE 0064
CGE 0274
CTC 0274
CXC 0207
CANDLE 0057
CARNIVALE 0057
CARVER 0081, 0197
CASCADE 0036
CATHAY 0064
CELEBRITY 0027
CELERA 0792
CENTURION 0064
CHANGHONG
0792
CHING TAI 0036, 0119
CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,
0207
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207
CIMLINE 0036
CINERAL 0119, 0478
CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119
CLARION 0207
CLARIVOX 0064
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397
CONDOR 0347, 0397
CONRAC 0835
CONTEC 0036, 0207
CRAIG 0207
CROSLEY 0081
CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,
0397, 0445
CURTIS MATHES
057, 0074, 0081,
0087, 0120, 0172,
0181, 0193, 0478,
0729, 1174, 1374
DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,
0119, 0135, 0181,
0197, 0205, 0207,
0401, 0478, 0650,
0661, 1688
DANSAI 0064
DAYTON 0036
DE GRAAF 0235, 0575
DECCA 0064, 0543
DENON 0172
DIGATRON 0064
DIXI 0036, 0064
DUMONT 0044
DWIN 0747, 0801
ECE 0064
ELBE 0286
ELECTROBAND
0027
ELIN 0064, 0575
ELITE 0347
ELTA 0036
EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,
0263, 0388, 0490,
0650
ENVISION 0057,0840
EPSON 0860
ERRES 0064
ETHER 0036, 0057
ETRON 0036
EUROPHON 0543
FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,
0265, 0314, 0362,
0587
FIDELITY 0388
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373
FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,
0373, 0543
FIRSTAR 0036, 0263
FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695
FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,
0397
FLINT 0482
FORMENTI 0064, 0347
FORTRESS 0120
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291
FUJITSU 0710, 0836
FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291
FUTURETECH
0207
GE 0057, 0074, 0078,
0119, 0205, 0207,
0478, 0587, 1174,
1374, 1481
GEC 0064, 0543
GATEWAY 1782, 1783
GELOSO 0036
GENEXXA 0190
GIBRALTER 0044, 0057
GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,
0181, 0205, 0404
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,
0661
GOREMJE 0397
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197
GRAETZ 0190, 0388
GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,
0543
GRANDIN 0637
GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,
0583, 0614
GRUNPY 0207
HCM 0036, 0439
HALLMARK 0205
HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,
0455, 0583
HANTAREX 0543
HARMAN/KARDON
0081
HARVARD 0207
HAVERMY 0120
HELLO KITTY
0478
HINARI 0036, 0064
HISAWA 0482
HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,
0132, 0136, 0172,
0190, 0205, 0252,
0383, 0508, 0575,
0605, 1172, 1283
HUA TUN 0036
HUANYU 0401
HYPSON 0064, 0291
ICE 0291, 0398
ITS 0398
ITT 0190, 0388, 0575
IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445
INDIANA 0064
INFINITY 0081
INGELEN 0190
INNO HIT 0543
INNOVA 0064
INTEQ 0044
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,
0388, 0539
INTERVISION
0064, 0291, 0404
JBL 0081
JCB 0027
JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,
0680, 0710
JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,
0183, 0263
JENSEN 0788
KEC 0207
KTV 0057, 0207
KAISUI 0036
KAPSCH 0190
KARCHER 0637
KATHREIN 0583
KENDO 0064
KENWOOD 0057
KNEISSEL 0286, 0462
KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207
KORPEL 0064
KOYODA 0036
L&S ELECTRONIC
0835
LG 0057, 0064, 0087,
0135, 0205, 0741
LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0205
LEYCO 0064, 0291
LIESENK & TTER
0064
LOEWE 0539
LUXOR 0383, 0388
M ELECTRONIC
0036, 0064, 0131,
0132, 0136, 0190,
0314, 0373, 0401,
0507
MGA 0057, 0177, 0205
MTC 0057, 0087, 0539
MAGNADYNE
0274, 0543
MAGNAFON 0543
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,
1481
MANESTH 0291, 0347
MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,
0583
MARK 0064
MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,
0398, 0514, 0543
MATSUSHITA
0277, 0677
MEDIATOR 0064
MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064
MEGATRON 0172, 0205
MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,
0205, 0277, 0490,
1064
METZ 0474
MICROMAXX
0835
MICROSTAR 0835
MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078
MINERVA 0514
MINOKA 0439
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,
0177, 0181, 0205,
0207, 0263, 0277,
0539, 0863, 1277
MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,
0636
MOTOROLA 0120
MULTITECH 0036, 0207
MYRYAD 0583
NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,
0893
NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,
0181, 0183, 0197,
0205, 0482, 0524,
1731
NEI 0064
NTC 0119
NECKERMANN
0064, 0583
NETSAT 0064
NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,
0205
NIKKAI 0064, 0291
NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205
NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,
0575, 0658
NORCENT 0775, 0851
NORDMENDE
0136, 0314, 0587
OCEANIC 0190, 0388
ONWA 0207, 0460
OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,
0677
OPTONICA 0120
ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,
0490, 0543
OSAKI 0291, 0439
OTTO VERSAND
0064, 0347, 0539,
0583
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445
PANAMA 0291
PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,
0190, 0277, 0677,
1437
PATHE CINEMA
0265, 0347
PAUSA 0036
PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,
0087, 0183, 0205,
1374
PERDIO 0347
PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,
0172, 0205, 0207,
0274, 0490, 1688
PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,
0078, 0081, 0119,
0135, 0205, 0401,
0583, 0717, 1481
PHONOLA 0064
PILOT 0057
vi
APPENDIX
PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,
0314, 0706, 0787,
0893
PORTLAND 0119
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0543
PRIMA 0788
PRISM 0078
PROFEX 0036, 0388
PROSCAN 0074
PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,
0291, 0445, 0695
PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205
PULSAR 0044
QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677
QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
R-LINE 0064
RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,
0117, 0119, 0205,
0706, 1074, 1174,
1274, 1374, 1474,
1481, 1574
RFT 0455
RADIOSHACK
0057, 0074, 0181,
0205, 0207
RADIOLA 0064
RADIOMARELLI
0543
REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,
0207
REDIFFUSION
0388
REOC 0741
REVOX 0064
REX 0190, 0286, 0291
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445
RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,
0630
SBR 0064
SEG 0291, 0695
SEI 0543
SKY 0064
SSS 0207
SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,
0362
SACCS 0265
SAGEM 0637
SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543
SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,
0575
SAMBERS 0543
SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,
0120, 0181, 0198,
0205, 0677, 1782
SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,
0087, 0117, 0119,
0181, 0205, 0291,
0397, 0583, 0614,
0645, 0729, 0793,
0839, 0841
SANSEI 0478
SANSUI 0490
SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,
0235, 0366, 0826
SCHAUB LORENZ
0388
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,
0695
SCOTCH 0205
SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263
SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0198, 0205
SELECO 0190, 0286
SEMIVOX 0207
SEMP 0183
SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677
SHEN YING 0036, 0119
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263
SIAREM 0543
SIEMENS 0064, 0222
SINUDYNE 0543
SKANTIC 0383
SKYGIANT 0207
SKYWORTH 0064
SOLAVOX 0190
SONITRON 0235
SONOKO 0036, 0064
SONOLOR 0190, 0235
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,
1127, 1532, 1678
SOUNDESIGN
0205, 0207
SOUNDWAVE
0064, 0445
SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,
0183, 0205
SQUAREVIEW
0198
STANDARD 0036
STARLITE 0207
STERN 0190, 0286
SUPREME 0027
SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207
SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0478
SYSLINE 0064
T + A 0474
TCM 0835
TMK 0205
TNCI 0044
TVS 0490
TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205
TAI YI 0036
TANDY 0120, 0190
TASHIKO 0119, 0677
TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,
0081, 0087, 0181,
0183, 0543
TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,
0439, 0445, 0482,
0695, 1064
TEC 0274
TECHNEMA 0347
TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677
TECHWOOD 0078
TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0291,
0680
TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,
0177, 0207
TELEFUNKEN
0136, 0289, 0362,
0652, 0729
TELEMEISTER
0347
TELETECH 0036
TENSAI 0347
TERA 0057
THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,
0652, 1474
THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,
0535, 0645, 0677,
0859, 1283, 1383,
1683, 1731
TRIUMPH 0543
TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119
UHER 0347
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,
0291, 0373, 0397,
0519
VECTOR RESEARCH
0057
VESTEL 0064
VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,
0680
VIDEOSAT 0274
VIDIKRON 0081
VIDTECH 0205
VIEWSONIC 1782
VISION 0347
VOXSON 0190
WALTHAM 0383
WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,
0893
WATSON 0064, 0347
WAYCON 0183
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0064, 0347, 0490,
0650
YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677,
0796, 0860,
2900 (projector),
2901 (projector),
2903,
2904 (projector)
YAPSHE 0277
YOKO 0064, 0291
ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,
0490
VCR
ASA 0064, 0108
ADMIRAL 0075
ADVENTURA 0027
AIKO 0305
AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,
0375, 0379
AKAI 0068, 0342
AKIBA 0099
ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,
0379
AMERICA ACTION
0305
AMERICAN HIGH
0062
AMSTRAD 0027
ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,
0305, 0507
ANAM NATIONAL
0253, 1589
ANITECH 0099
ASHA 0267
ASUKA 0064
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305
BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305
BEAUMARK 0267
BELL & HOWELL
0131
BLAUPUNKT 0253
BRANDT 0347
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
0068
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506
BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379
CCE 0099, 0305
CGE 0027
CALIX 0064
CANON 0062
CARVER 0108
CIMLINE 0099
CINERAL 0305
CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305
COLT 0099
COMBITECH 0379
CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,
0267
CROWN 0099, 0305
CURTIS MATHES
0062, 0068, 0087,
1062
CYBERNEX 0267
CYRUS 0108
DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,
0669, 1305
DANSAI 0099
DE GRAAF 0069
DECCA 0027, 0108
DENON 0069
DUAL 0068
DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131
DYNATECH 0027
ESC 0267, 0305
ELCATECH 0099
ELECTROHOME
0064
ELECTROPHONIC
0064
EMEREX 0059
EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,
0070, 0072, 0211,
0267, 0305, 1305,
1506
FERGUSON 0068, 0347
FIDELITY 0027
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131
FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,
0131
FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,
0099
FISHER 0074, 0131
FUJI 0060, 0062
FUJITSU 0027, 0072
FUNAI 0027
GE 0062, 0087, 0267,
0834, 1062, 1087
GEC 0108
GARRARD 0027
GENERAL 0072
GO VIDEO 0459
GOLDHAND 0099
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,
1264
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,
0305
GRADIENTE 0027
GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267
GRANADA 0108, 0131
GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099
GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,
0374
HCM 0099
HI-Q 0074
HANSEATIC 0064
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0027
HARMAN/KARDON
0108
HARWOOD 0099
HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379
HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,
0069, 0267
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2007 All rights reserved.
RX-V661
Printed in Malaysia WJ70020
RX-V661
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
G
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON 0099
ITT 0068, 0131, 0267
ITV 0064, 0305
IMPERIAL 0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC 0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN 0068
KEC 0064, 0305
KLH 0099
KAISUI 0099
KENWOOD 0068, 0094
KODAK 0062, 0064
KOLIN 0068, 0070
KORPEL 0099
LG 0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI 0064
LENCO 0305
LEYCO 0099
LLOYD’S 0027
LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK 0099, 0267
LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC
0027
MEI 0062
MGA 0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC 0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC
1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN 0267
MANESTH 0072, 0099
MARANTZ 0062, 0108
MARTA 0064
MATSUI 0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA
0062
MEDION 0375
MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS 0099
METZ 0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA 0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY 0027
MYRYAD 0108
NAD 0131
NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL 0253
NECKERMANN 0108
NESCO 0099
NEWAVE 0064
NIKKO 0064
NOBLEX 0267
NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE 0068, 0347
OCEANIC 0027, 0068
OKANO 0342, 0375
OLYMPUS 0062, 0253
OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND 0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX 0069
PERDIO 0027
PHILCO 0062
PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA 0108
PILOT 0064
PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC 0267
PROLINE 0027
PROSCAN 0087, 1087
PROTEC 0099
PULSAR 0066
PYE 0108
QUASAR 0062, 1062
QUELLE 0108
RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK 0027
RADIOLA 0108
RADIX 0064
RANDEX 0064
REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC 0375
REPLAYTV 0641, 0643
REX 0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO 0066
SBR 0108
SEG 0267
SEI 0108
STS 0069
SABA 0068, 0347
SALORA 0070
SAMPO 0064, 0075
SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY 0066, 0075
SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE 0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO 0068
SEMP 0072
SHARP 0075, 0834
SHINTOM 0099, 0131
SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA 0064
SINGER 0072, 0099
SINUDYNE 0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI 0375
SUNSTAR 0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK 0267
TANDY 0027, 0131
TASHIKO 0027, 0064
TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS 0062, 0253
TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA 0068
TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347
TENOSAL 00 99
TENSAI 0027
THOMAS 0027
THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN 0068, 0131
TIVO 0645, 0663
TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER 0267
UNITECH 0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR 0072
VICTOR 0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC 0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN 0027
WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA 0068
YAMISHI 0099
YOKAN 0099
YOKO 0267
ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
RX-V661_G-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 10:57 PM
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.
Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung.
Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen.
De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing.
Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации.
■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/Фронтальная панель
RX-V861/RX-V661
G
VOLUME
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
ON/OFF
AUDIO SELECT
TONE CONTROL OPTIMIZER MIC
1
234
SPEAKERS
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM A/B/C/D/E
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
CONTROL
ZONE
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
ON
OFF
G
1234 567 89 0
ACDEHBIJF
00_sheet_RX-V861-661_G.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 17, 2007 10:08 AM
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/
Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
1234
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
SLEEP
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
DVD
TUNER
MD/CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
SCENE
POWER
STANDBY
4
3
2
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
ENHANCER
MOVIE
A
B
C
D
F
G
H
I
K
L
J
M
N
O
P
Q
T
R
S
U
VW
E
XY
WK14520
Printed in Malaysia
00_sheet_RX-V861-661_G.book Page i Wednesday, January 17, 2007 10:08 AM
Documenttranscriptie
RX-V661_G-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 10:57 PM G MINOLTA MITSUBISHI 0069 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WJ70020 RX-V661 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI 0099 KENWOOD 0068, 0094 KODAK 0062, 0064 KOLIN 0068, 0070 KORPEL 0099 LG 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 RX-V661 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. En 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. This symbol mark is according to the EU directive 2002/96/EC. This symbol mark means that electrical and electronic equipment, at their endof-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. Please act according to your local rules and do not dispose of your old products with your normal household waste. Contents Notice ....................................................................... 2 Features ................................................................... 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Getting started ........................................................ 4 Quick start guide .................................................... 5 Connections ........................................................... 11 Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room ................................................................... 28 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 28 BASIC OPERATION Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 33 Playback ................................................................ 37 Sound field programs .......................................... 42 Using audio features ............................................. 48 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 48 Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 48 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 48 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo ....49 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 49 Using SET MENU................................................... 69 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 70 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 76 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 79 Remote control features........................................82 Using the remote control for the SCENE feature .... 82 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 83 Setting remote control codes ................................... 85 Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 87 Changing source names in the display window....... 88 Macro programming features .................................. 89 Clearing configurations ........................................... 92 Using multi-zone configuration............................95 Connecting Zone 2................................................... 95 Controlling Zone 2................................................... 96 Advanced setup......................................................98 Using the advanced setup ........................................ 98 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting...................................................102 Resetting the system............................................109 Glossary................................................................110 Sound field program information......................112 Parametric equalizer information .....................113 Specifications .......................................................114 Index .....................................................................116 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii List of remote control codes ................................. iii ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting sound field programs ............................... 42 Sound field program descriptions............................ 42 Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode)............................................................. 47 Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........67 ADVANCED OPERATION Basic procedure ....................................................... 37 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38 Selecting the front speaker set ................................. 38 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 39 Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor ................................................................ 39 Using your headphones............................................ 40 Muting the audio output........................................... 40 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source................................................................... 40 Displaying the input source information ................. 40 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 41 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 59 Selecting decoders ................................................... 64 BASIC OPERATION Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 33 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 36 Advanced sound configurations...........................59 PREPARATION PREPARATION ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 50 APPENDIX Automatic tuning ..................................................... 50 Manual tuning.......................................................... 50 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 51 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 51 Selecting preset stations........................................... 52 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 52 Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) ......................................... 53 Using iPod™.......................................................... 56 Controlling iPod™................................................... 56 “1SPEAKERS” or “A DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. Recording .............................................................. 58 1 En English Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 53 Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY SEEK mode)........................................................ 54 Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data service ...................................................................... 55 NOTICE Notice About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “1SPEAKERS” or “A DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS-ES | NEO:6 | 96/24. Product “DTS” and “DTS-ES | NEO:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. “96/24” is a trademark of DTS, Inc. iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. 2 En Features Features HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 90 W + 90 W Center: 90 W Surround: 90 W + 90 W Surround back: 90 W + 90 W ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a iPod controlling capability SCENE function ◆ 17 preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability ◆ Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support component (some models only) working with the SCENE function Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix, Discrete, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning Automatic preset tuning Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) Radio Data System capability (Europe model only) ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini ◆ Playback information displaying capability ◆ Battery charging capability INTRODUCTION Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multichannel input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes capability ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2 using ZONE CONTROL ◆ Bi-amplification connection capability ◆ Sleep timer Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control POWER TV POWER STANDBY Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna POWER AV SCENE 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R 3 CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD 4 SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE TV SET MENU MENU AUDIO BAND PURE DIRECT ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 1 STEREO 3 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 MOVIE 4 NIGHT 8 SLEEP Optimizer microphone Indoor FM antenna ENT REC FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME English Note The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models. 3 En GETTING STARTED Getting started ■ Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the transmit indicator (X) does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use an old battery together with a new one. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 En ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) Caution The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: Asia model ...................................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........................110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V Voltage indication Quick start guide Quick start guide Video monitor Front right speaker Front left speaker INTRODUCTION The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Preparation: Check the items Subwoofer Surround right speaker In these steps, you need the following supplied accessories. ❏ AM loop antenna ❏ Indoor FM antenna Center speaker Surround back right speaker DVD player Surround back left speaker Surround left speaker Step 1: Set up your speakers ☞ P. 6 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 7 The following items are not included in the package of this unit. ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speakers .................................... 2 ❏ Center speaker ................................... 1 ❏ Surround speakers ............................. 4 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1. Two surround speakers 2. Center speaker 3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s) ❏ Active subwoofer .................................... 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. ❏ Speaker cables ........................................ 7 ❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player ............................................... 1 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor........................................... 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button ☞ P. 9 ❏ Video cable .............................................. 1 Select an RCA composite video cable. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ..................... 1 Enjoy DVD playback! English 5 En Quick start guide Step 1: Set up your speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT L L R R CENTER ZONE 2 OUT PRE OUT SINGLE Front speakers and center speaker VIDEO CENTER VIDEO GND PHONO CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN OUT VCR S VIDEO FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER DVD DTV/CBL IN HDMI DOCK PR MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL CD DVD 1 2 3 4 5 6 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT ANTENNA DVD IN1 COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DVR OUT IN OUT VCR MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR DTV/CBL B P B Y Loosen Insert Tighten DIGITAL INPUT SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L AM A PB DVD OUT FRONT A R L MONITOR OUT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER R L R C DVR AC OUTLETS L GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN TRIGGER OUT OUT +12V 15mA MAX. PRESENCE SINGLE 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. To the front right speaker To the front left speaker Center speaker Surround and surround back speakers Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. 1 2 3 To the surround right speaker 4 To the surround back left speaker To the surround left speaker 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. 5 To the surround back right speaker Connect the subwoofer cable to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and the input jack of the subwoofer. Subwoofer AV receiver SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Input jack Subwoofer cable 6 En Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components MULTI CH INPUT L R CENTER ZONE 2 OUT PRE OUT SINGLE Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. VIDEO CENTER VIDEO GND PHONO CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN OUT VCR S VIDEO FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND DOCK SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER DVD DTV/CBL IN HDMI PR ANTENNA MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DVD 1 2 3 DTV/CBL 4 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT CD DVD 5 6 DVD IN1 COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DVR OUT IN VCR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD player COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR DTV/CBL B P B Y AV receiver OUT DIGITAL INPUT SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L AM A PB DVD FRONT A R SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER L MONITOR OUT R L R C DVR AC OUTLETS L GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN OUT TRIGGER OUT +12V 15mA MAX. PRESENCE INTRODUCTION AUDIO L R 2 SINGLE DVD VIDEO jack Composite video output jack Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 3 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD COAXIAL jack of this unit. Video cable Connect the video cable to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video input jack of your video monitor. Video monitor AV receiver DVD player AV receiver Video input jack Digital coaxial audio output jack Video cable Digital coaxial audio cable VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack DVD DIGITAL INPUT coaxial jack English 7 En Quick start guide 4 Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and indoor FM antenna to this unit. See page 24 for the connection information. ■ For further connections • Using the other kind of speaker combinations ☞ P. 12 • Connecting a video monitor via various ways of the connection ☞ P. 18 AM loop antenna • Connecting a DVD player via various ways of the connection ☞ P. 19 • Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video recorder ☞ P. 20 • Connecting a set-top box Indoor FM antenna Open the lever Insert ☞ P. 20 Close the lever • Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or a turntable ☞ P. 21 • Connecting an external amplifier ☞ P. 22 • Connecting a DVD player via analog multichannel audio connection y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal ☞ P. 22 • Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock ☞ P. 23 Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna • Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ☞ P. 23 • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 23 • Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 24 5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other components into the AC wall outlet. y This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) for the power supply of the other components (except Korea model). See page 24 for details. Note The type of the power plug is different depending on the models. 8 En Quick start guide Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button 4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. If the connected DVD player is a Yamaha product and has capability of the SCENE control signals with the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit (see page 23), this unit can automatically activate the DVD player and start playback when you press the F SCENE1 button. Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD player for further information. Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 99). 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position on the front panel. 5 INTRODUCTION y Rotate 0 VOLUME to adjust the volume. Note When you change the input source or sound field program, the SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the selected SCENE button turns off. ■ Using the other SCENE buttons 3 Press F SCENE1 button. “DVD Movie Viewing” appears in the front panel display, and this unit automatically optimize own status for the DVD playback. In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding SCENE button to enjoy the playback of the desired sources. Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player...” Press F SCENE2 (or A SCENE2) to select “Music Disc Listening”. Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...” Press F SCENE3 (or A SCENE3) to select “TV Viewing”. Case C: “I want to listen to a music program of the FM/AM radio station...” The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while this unit is in the SCENE mode. 9 En English y Press F SCENE4 (or A SCENE4) to select “Radio Listening”. Quick start guide Notes • To use the “TV Viewing” template (Case B), you must connect a satellite receiver, a cable TV receiver or an HDTV decoder to this unit in advance. See page 20 for details. • To use the “Radio Listening” template (Case C), you have to tune into the desired radio station. See pages 50 to 52 for the tuning information. • To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. What do you want to do with this unit? ■ Customizing the SCENE templates • Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 33 • Creating your original SCENE templates ☞ P. 36 y If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See page 33 for details. ■ Using various input sources • Basic controls of this unit ■ After using this unit... Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the standby mode. ☞ P. 37 • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 50 • Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 56 ■ Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 42 • Using the pure direct mode for high fidelity sound ☞ P. 48 • Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 59 ■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press the desired F SCENE buttons (or A SCENE) or A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or I POWER on the remote control). See page 25 for details. • Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 28 • Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit manually ☞ P. 69 • Setting the remote control ☞ P. 82 • Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 98 ■ Additional features Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 41 10 En CONNECTIONS Connections Rear panel AUDIO jacks ZONE 2 OUT jacks Connect the analog audio cable plugs. Connect the amplifier in Zone 2. Video jacks Connect the video cable plugs. ☞ P. 95 ☞ P. 18-21 ☞ P. 18-20 MULTI CH INPUT jacks PRE OUT jacks Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (sold separately). Connect the input source component equipped with the multi-channel output jacks. Connect external amplifiers and an active subwoofer. ☞ P. 23 ☞ P. 22 ☞ P. 22 AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT CENTER ZONE 2 OUT PRE OUT SINGLE VIDEO CENTER VIDEO L L PREPARATION DOCK terminal GND S VIDEO R R PHONO CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN OUT VCR FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND DOCK SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER DVD DTV/CBL IN HDMI PR MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DVD 1 2 3 DTV/CBL 4 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT ANTENNA CD DVD 5 6 DVD IN1 COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DVR OUT IN Y PR OUT VCR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT DTV/CBL B PB Y OUT DIGITAL INPUT SPEAKERS FRONT A FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L AM A PB DVD R R C MONITOR OUT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER L L DVR AC OUTLETS L R GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN TRIGGER OUT +12V 15mA MAX. OUT PRESENCE SINGLE DIGITAL INPUT/ OUTPUT jacks Speaker terminals Connect the speakers. Connect the digital audio cable plugs. ☞ P. 13 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) ☞ P. 4 ☞ P. 19-21 AC OUTLET(S) HDMI connectors ANTENNA terminals Connect the FM and AM antenna. ANTENNA AM IN OUT ☞ P. 24 ☞ P. 16 ☞ P. 24 GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE Connect the HDMI components. TRIGGER +12V 15mA MAX. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Connect the remote control input and output jacks of the Yamaha components. ☞ P. 23 English TRIGGER OUT Outputs the control signals to external components. 11 En Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multichannel audio sources. PL PR C FR FL PR FR PL SW FL 30˚ C SL SR SR SBR SBL SL 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR 1.8 m (6 ft) 30 cm (12 in) or more Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field programs (see page 42). To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 29 and 70). 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL 1.8 m (6 ft) PR FL FR 1.8 m (6 ft) C Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 12 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Note PREPARATION Caution • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 25). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. • Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 99). A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. EXTRA SP terminals Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), presence speakers or Zone 2 speakers. To select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 70). Subwoofer y You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 29). PRE OUT SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L FRONT A R SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER L R L R PRESENCE L SINGLE Left Right Surround speakers Center speaker Left Right Surround back speakers When you use single surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE). 13 En English Left Right Front speakers (FRONT A) Connections ■ Connecting the speaker cable 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting the banana plug (except Europe, Asia and Korea models) Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. 10 mm (0.4 in) 2 Loosen the knob. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Using bi-amplification connections Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. Caution Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support biamplification. To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 101). Front speakers Right 4 Left Tighten the knob to secure the wire. FRONT A R SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP L R SINGLE L This unit Note When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the speakers for details. 14 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs AUDIO R (White) (Red) L R Left and right analog audio cable plugs DIGITAL DIGITAL COAXIAL OPTICAL (Orange) C Coaxial digital audio cable plug VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Notes • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. PREPARATION L Video jacks and cable plugs S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See pages 17 and 79 for details. English 15 En Connections Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. HDMI HDMI cable plug y This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 41). 16 En ■ HDMI jack and cable plug • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. Connections Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Output Input HDMI Output HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) AUDIO PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) S VIDEO VIDEO Digital output Through Analog output Video conversion ON (see page 79) Notes Notes • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” (see page 75). • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. • When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: 1. COMPONENT VIDEO 2. S VIDEO 3. VIDEO • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks. • This unit does not accept analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution. • The OSD signal is not output at the VCR OUT, DVR OUT and HDMI MONITOR OUT jacks and is not recorded. • This unit does not deinterlace any analog video signals. English 17 En Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Notes • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. • When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video connection. • Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack to display the video images on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. y You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 75). VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y OUT MONITOR OUT PR HDMI in PB Y Component video in S S-video in Video in TV (or projector) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 18 En V Connections Connecting other components Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Notes ■ Connecting a DVD player Optical out DVD player PREPARATION • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 79), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 79), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. Video out Audio out S-video out Coaxial out HDMI out R O L Component video out C PR PB V S Y AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO DVD DVD HDMI PR DVD A PB DVD COMPONENT VIDEO Y DVD 3 6 OPTICAL COAXIAL DVD IN1 DIGITAL INPUT indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections English 19 En Connections ■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR DVD recorder, PVR or VCR Audio out S-video in Audio in Video in Video out R L R L S-video out V V S AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO IN DVR OUT IN VCR IN OUT DVR OUT IN OUT VCR COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB C S S V Video in S-video in S-video out Video out Audio in L V Y DVR PR PB Y Component video out R Audio out L R DVD recorder, PVR ■ Connecting a set-top box Satellite receiver, cable TV receiver or HDTV decoder S-video out Video out Component video out R HDMI out L Audio out Optical out O V PR PB S Y AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO DTV/CBL DTV/CBL HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR DTV/CBL 4 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT 20 En DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL B P B Y Connections ■ Connecting audio components Notes • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76). • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some turntables. • The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier. • When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component, the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. CD player L R C Coaxial out R Audio out Audio out Ground L PREPARATION Turntable AUDIO L GND R PHONO IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) CD MD/CD-R MD/CD-R 1 2 5 DIGITAL INPUT R L R L Audio in O Audio out Optical in Optical out O CD COAXIAL DIGITAL OUTPUT CD recorder, MD recorder or tape deck English indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 21 En Connections ■ Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Notes • • • • • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 48). Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 48). Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70). 5 PRE OUT SINGLE CENTER L 3 SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks Surround back channel output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack. Notes R FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER 1 2 3 4 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. • When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, this unit outputs the front channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks. • The audio signals output at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks differ depending on the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting (see page 70). 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel output jacks. 4 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel output jack. ■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier. If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. MULTI CH INPUT CENTER MULTI CH INPUT CENTER L SB(8CH) R L R L SURROUND R SUB WOOFER Center out R SB(8CH) Subwoofer out L FRONT(6CH) Surround out Front out Center out R Multi-format player/External decoder (5.1-channel output) Multi-format player/External decoder (7.1-channel output) *1 22 En R SUB WOOFER Subwoofer out Surround out Front out L SURROUND Surround back out FRONT(6CH) R L *1 R L L The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78). Connections ■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. • If the components have the capability of the SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding components and start the playback when you use one of the SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components. • Connect the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit and the remote control input jack of the components to control the components by using the SCENE feature. • If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup menu to “OFF” (see page 101). Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. PREPARATION DOCK y Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Notes Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) • The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. • To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. ■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN jack and REMOTE OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL SCENE 1 2 3 4 INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL REMOTE IN Remote control out Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O OUT Remote control in S-Video output Video output Audio output Optical output Yamaha component Game console or video camera English 23 En Connections Connecting the FM and AM antennas Connecting the power cable Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. y See page 8 for connection information of the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna. AC OUTLETS Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. AM loop antenna (supplied) ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) Indoor FM antenna (supplied) ANTENNA AM GND FM Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 24 En To the AC wall outlet U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet Korea model............................................................... None Other models......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when B MASTER ON/ OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to the OFF position. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 114. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. Connections Setting the speaker impedance Caution If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers. 1 Press and hold C TONE CONTROL on the front panel and then press B MASTER ON/ OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. TONE CONTROL While holding down MASTER ON 3 OFF Rotate the D PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “SP IMP.”. “SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting (“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display. ■ Turning on this unit Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. When you turn on this unit by pressing B MASTER ON/ OFF, the main zone is turned on. y When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. ■ Turning off this unit Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Notes • A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as I POWER and H STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when B MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. • As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this unit. ■ Set the main zone to the standby mode 4 Press C TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”. Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or H STANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode. 5 Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. PREPARATION 2 Make sure this unit is turned off. Refer to the right column for details. Turning this unit on and off ■ Turning on the main zone from the standby mode Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or I POWER) to turn on the main zone. y • You can also turn on the main zone by pressing F SCENE (or A SCENE) buttons. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • These buttons are operational only when B MASTER ON/ OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. English 25 En Connections Front panel display 1 2 t 3 4 VCR 96 24 DVR 7 6 V-AUX DTV/CBL 8 DVD DOCK MATRIX DISCRETE DSD ENHANCER q EX 5 VIRTUAL SP SILENT CINEMA A B ZONE2 NIGHT HiFi DSP 9 MD/CD-R TUNER 0 CD PHONO YPAO AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY VOLUME PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP B C 96/24 LFE ft q PL mS dB PCM D E F G H I J K L dB MUTE q DIGITAL q PL x q PL A M L C R SL SB SR N O L ........ Europe model only 1B Input signal indicators Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 2C Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. 9 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode (see pages 50 to 52). 0 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 40). A VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. 3 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 46). D Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. 4 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 16). E VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 46). 5 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 46). F Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 40). 6 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23) and V-AUX is selected as the input source. The DOCK indicator also lights up when this unit is charging the battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode. 7 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 8 YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 28). 26 En G SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. H ZONE2 indicator Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 96). I NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 49). J DSP indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP sound field programs are selected (see page 42). K Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. Connections L Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) PS, PTY, RT and CT Light up according to the selected Radio Data System display mode. Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. Remote control sensor M SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 41). Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 30 PREPARATION PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 30 N 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. O Input channel and speaker indicators LFE L C R SL SB SR LFE indicator Presence speaker indicators Input channel indicators Surround back speaker indicators Infrared window (Y) Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. Transmit indicator (X) Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. Display window (J) Shows the name of the selected input source that you can control. Presence and surround back speaker indicators Light up according to the number of presence and surround back speakers set for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 70) and “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) in “SOUND MENU” when this unit is in the auto setup (see page 28) or the speaker level setting in “SOUND MENU” (see page 72) procedure. Operation mode selector (L) The function of some buttons depends on the operation mode selector position. y • You can make settings for surround back speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) or manually by adjusting settings for “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) in “SOUND MENU”. • To use the presence speakers, set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see page 29 or 70). AMP Operates the amplifier function of this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 84). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 83). Notes 27 En English • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 85. OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Using AUTO SETUP 2 Notes • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL y • You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to L AMP. • This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment. 1 The following menu screen appears on the video monitor. AUTO:MENU . EXTRASPASSIGN ZONE2 >FRONTB PRESENCENONE SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL START [ [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down []/[]:Select [ [ 3 [ Make sure of the following check points before starting the AUTO SETUP operations. ❏ Speakers are connected appropriately. ❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit. ❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on. ❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). ❏ The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer is set to the maximum. ❏ The room is sufficiently quiet. Omni-directional microphone Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.). 28 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 4 Press D l / h to select the desired setting for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press D n. 6 Extra speaker assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals. Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE • When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see page 96) Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers to the Zone 2 speakers. This unit drives the Zone 2 speakers by using the internal amplifier. • When you use the presence speakers (see page 12) Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the speakers to the presence speakers. If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 101), you cannot select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”. Press D n to select “START” and then press D ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the “AUTO:RESULT” display appears in the OSD. Press D l / h to select “SETUP”. Notes Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the previous settings. • Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and restore the previous settings. • Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP” parameters to the initial factory settings. • During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure. Note 5 7 PREPARATION Parametric equalizer type EQ Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the crucial frequency bands for the listening room and adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment from the following choices. Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT • Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little harsh. • Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. • Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. • When you use the alternative front speaker system (see page 38) Select “FRONT B”. • When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP terminals. Press D l / h to select the desired setting of “EQ” and then press D n. Notes • “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. • “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see page 101) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 70). English 29 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit performs the following checks: The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows. Speaker wiring WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Equalizing EQUALIZING Checks and adjusts the tonal characteristics of all the speakers by the setting of “EQ”. Notes • If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 4. • If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 32. • When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning messages appears in the above of “RESULT” (see page 32). • Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 72) is automatically set to “REVERSE”. Speaker level LEVEL Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. The display changes as follows. AUTO:MENU EXTRASPASSIGN ZONE2 >FRONTB PRESENCENONE SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL . START [ [ [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down []/[]:Select [ [ AUTO:CHECK [ INITIALIZING . WIRING SIZE/DISTANCE EQUALIZING LEVEL CHECKCH=CENTER |||||;;;;;;;; []:Exit 8 Press D ENTER to display the setup results in detail. AUTO:RESULT AUTO:RESULT . RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB > SET CANCEL . RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB > SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return 30 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 9 Press D l / h repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. 10 Press D ENTER to return to the top “AUTO:RESULT” display. Results of the speaker connection and wiring AUTO:RESULT . RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB > SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Results of the speaker distance from the listening position Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET” and “CANCEL” and then press D l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. Results of the setting of each speaker size AUTO:RESULT PREPARATION 11 RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB . > SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Results of the parametric equalizer of each speaker Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. Results of the speaker output level 12 y Press D ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 67). SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO Notes p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the same frequency to provide finer adjustments. 13 Press N SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. 14 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from this unit. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. y 31 En English If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room ■ If an error screen appears 2 Press D k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press D ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-9:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. Press D l / h repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. WARNING:W-1 <OUT OF PHASE> Reverse Channel FL -CENTER PL PR SL SR SBL SBR [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return AUTO:ERROR . E-9:USER CANCEL Don't operate any function. >RETRY EXIT y [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Enter Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. ■ If “WARNING” appears When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the “AUTO:RESULT” display. Check the warning messages to correct your speaker settings. Note Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press D ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. AUTO:RESULT . WARNING(3) RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB >SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 32 En • For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 107. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed instead. 3 Press D ENTER to return to the top “AUTO:RESULT” display. SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 17 preset SCENE templates for various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to each SCENE button: 2 SCENE 1: DVD Movie Viewing SCENE 2: Music Disc Listening SCENE 3: TV Viewing SCENE 4: Radio Listening Rotate the I INPUT selector (or set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press D l / h) to select the desired template. DVD Viewing If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. Select the desired SCENE template 3 Press the F SCENE (or A SCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The selected SCENE template is assigned to the SCENE button. 1 SCENE template library (Image) Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button Selecting the desired SCENE template 1 Front panel or BASIC OPERATION 1 1 Remote control Notes • If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is automatically canceled. • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 82 for details. Press and hold the F SCENE (or A SCENE) button for 3 seconds. The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of the currently assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel display. 3 seconds 3 seconds or 1 1 Remote control Front panel 1 Flashes English DVD MovieView 33 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Which SCENE template would you like to select? Which source do you like to play back? Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) Which component do you like for playback? DVD SCENE templates Default SCENE buttons DVD Viewing DVD Movie Viewing 1 DVD Live Viewing Music discs (CD, SACD or DVD-Audio) DVR DVR Viewing DVD Disc Hifi Listening Music Disc Listening 2 Disc Listening CD CD Hifi Listening CD Listening CD Music Listening Radio programs iPod * TV programs TUNER (FM/AM) Radio Listening DOCK iPod Listening To listening to the iPod, you need to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (sold separately) to this unit (see page 56). DTV/CBL TV Viewing TV Sports Viewing Video games V-AUX Action Game Playing RPG Playing Vinyl records PHONO LP Record Listening y You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 36 for details. 34 En 4 3 Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons as the default setting. SCENE template Input source Playback mode DVD Viewing DVD*1 Features STRAIGHT DVD Movie Viewing DVD*1 MOVIE Sci-Fi Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD Live Viewing DVD*1 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live video on your DVD player. DVR Viewing DVR MOVIE Drama Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. Disc Hifi Listening DVD*1 PURE DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player. Music Disc Listening DVD*1 STEREO 2ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. Disc Listening DVD*1 STEREO 7ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources on your DVD player as the background music. CD Hifi Listening CD*1 PURE DIRECT CD Listening CD*1 STEREO 2ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player. CD Music Listening CD*1 STEREO 7ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music source on your CD player as the background music. Radio Listening TUNER MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. iPod Listening DOCK (V-AUX) MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock. TV Viewing DTV/CBL STRAIGHT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general programs on your TV. TV Sports Viewing DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT Sports Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on your TV. Action Game Playing V-AUX*2 ENTERTAINMENT Action Game Select this SCENE template when you play action games such as car racing and FPS games. RPG Playing V-AUX*2 ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing games. LP Record Listening PHONO PURE DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on the DVD player. 1 2 BASIC OPERATION 4 Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player. 3 *1 *2 You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. English When the connected DVD player or CD player has the capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features. Select this SCENE template when you play back vinyl records on your turntable. 35 En Selecting the SCENE templates Creating your original SCENE templates 3 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 17 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. Select the desired SCENE template Create an original SCENE template • INPUT: • MODE: The input source component. The active sound field programs, STRAIGHT or Pure Direct mode. • NIGHT: The night listening mode (see page 49). − SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. − CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. − MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. SCENE template library (Image) 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press and hold the desired A SCENE button for 3 seconds. The SCENE template customizing screen appears on the video monitor. [ SCENE1 .pDVDViewing[ INPUT: DVD MODE:STRAIGHT NIGHT:SYSTEM [ENTER]:Rename [SCENE1]:SET [RETURN]:STATUS Note When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the A SCENE buttons, press D l / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the menu screen. 36 En Press D k / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then D l / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: 4 Press the A SCENE button again to confirm the edit. y An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. Notes • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding A SCENE buttons, you need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 82 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The newly created template is only available for the assigned SCENE button. ■ Rename the SCENE templates Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3 of “Creating your original SCENE templates” and then press D ENTER. • Press D k / n to select the desired character. • Press D l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the space or the desired character. • Press E RETURN to cancel the new name. • Press D ENTER to confirm the new name. PLAYBACK Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 50 for details about tuning instructions. 4 Rotate 0 VOLUME (or press K VOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. y To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to “DTS” before the playback (see page 78). y • See page 48 to adjust the level of each speaker. • This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. • You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume level (see page 75). y Basic procedure 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 5 Rotate the D PROGRAM selector (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons (U) repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. See page 42 for details about sound field programs. BASIC OPERATION Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to L AMP. y See page 40 to display the input source information. 2 Rotate the I INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (B)) to select the desired input source. Sci-Fi Currently selected sound field program The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display for a few seconds. Note Available input sources VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO INPUT:DVD Currently selected input source y The corresponding input selector button on the remote control for the currently selected input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the remote control, showing which source component is currently being operated. Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • To display information about the currently selected sound field program in the OSD, see page 59 for details. English 37 En Playback Selecting the front speaker set ■ A quick guide to contents When you want to... See page Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 48 Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 48 Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 59 Enjoy sources with a wide dynamic range at night 49 Use headphones 40 Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 49 Select a decoder to play back sources with 64 Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 41 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 22) as the input source. Rotate the I INPUT selector to select MULTI CH (or B MULTI CH IN). “MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display. y Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 78). Note Sound field programs and the night listening mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT A and/or FRONT B) on or off. Press 1 SPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or EXTRA SP speaker terminals. The active front speaker set changes as follows: FRONT A OFF FRONT B FRONT A and FRONT B Notes • FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, “ZONE 2” or “NONE” (see page 70). • Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front speaker setting. ■ Using the Zone B feature When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 70), you can use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room (Zone B). Press 1 SPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers. When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in the main room are muted. Notes • You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers simultaneously. • If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically (see page 46). 38 En Playback Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the same input source. You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press R DISPLAY on the remote control. The current status screen appears in the OSD. y • We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 80). Press H AUDIO SELECT (or O AUDIO) repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack select setting. STATUSVOL:-40.0dB Available input sources VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO A.SEL:AUTO Currently selected audio input jack select setting AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. y You can select the amount of time that the current status is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). BASIC OPERATION MOVIE Sci-Fi INPUT:DVD A.SEL:HDMI NIGHT:OFF Note The OSD signal is not output at the VIDEO output jacks and will not be recorded. Note This feature is not available when no digital input jacks (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 76). English 39 En Playback Using your headphones Playing video sources in the background of an audio source Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF Press the input selector buttons (B) on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. ZONE CONTROL SCENE 1 2 3 4 INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON OFF SILENT CINEMA EFFECT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD Audio sources Video sources y y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 46). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. Muting the audio output Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 78). Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Press M MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press M MUTE again to resume the audio output. SET MENU y [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 40 En . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO p • You can also rotate 0 VOLUME on the front panel or press K VOLUME +/– to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 74). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press N SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 2 Press D n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press D ENTER. The audio information about the input source appears in the OSD. 3 Press D l / h to toggle between the audio and video information displays. Playback 4 Press N SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. ■ Audio information Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 24). Set the operator mode to L AMP and then press S SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press S SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120min Note SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. “---” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. BASIC OPERATION FORMAT Using the sleep timer Flashes ■ Video information SLEEP HDMI RES. Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI ERROR Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See page 107 for details. SLEEP120min Lights up SLEEP STRAIGHT ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press S SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. Disappears SLEEPOFF The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. 41 En English y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing H STANDBY (or A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF) to set the main zone to the standby mode. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y • The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • You can change sound field parameters. See page 59 for details. Selecting sound field programs Rotate the D PROGRAM selector (or set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press one of the sound field selector buttons (U) repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. Notes • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the DTS 96/24 decoder. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied. • When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. Sound field program descriptions y Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. Remote control button Name of the program Category of the program Created sound fields CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP MOVIE MOVIE 4 Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. DSP LEVEL P.INIT. DLY P.ROOM SIZE S.INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY Available sound field parameters (see page 61) Sound field indicators Presence sound field Listening position Surround left sound field Surround back sound field 42 En Surround right sound field SB ROOM SIZE DIALG. LIFT Program description Sound field programs ■ For audio music sources y For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 48). Notes • The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70). CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 CLASSICAL Hall in Munich HiFi DSP This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL 1 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Chamber HiFi DSP BASIC OPERATION This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 LIVENESS REV.TIME LIVE/CLUB REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT Cellar Club HiFi DSP This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB DIALG.LIFT The Roxy Theatre HiFi DSP This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB REV.TIME REV.DELAY The Bottom Line REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT HiFi DSP This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT English 43 En Sound field programs ■ For various sources Notes • The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70). ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT ■ For visual sources of music Notes • The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70). LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video HiFi DSP This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY 44 En P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Sound field programs ■ For movie sources y You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 64 for details. Notes • The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70). MOVIE 4 MOVIE Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. DSP LEVEL S. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 S. ROOM SIZE S.LIVENESS MOVIE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE SB LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT Spectacle DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY MOVIE Sci-Fi SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT BASIC OPERATION This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound. This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. ROOM SIZE LIVENESS REV.TIME REV.DELAY English DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT 45 En Sound field programs ■ Stereo playback Note The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. STEREO 5 STEREO 2ch STEREO Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 49 for details. DIRECT STEREO 5 STEREO 7ch STEREO HiFi DSP Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL ■ The Compressed Music Enhancer ENHANCER 6 MUSIC ENHANCER 2ch Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. Effect level ENHANCER 6 MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. Effect level ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 71), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 42). SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 42). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode. 46 En Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 48) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 49) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 47). Sound field programs Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Press E STRAIGHT (or Q STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. STRAIGHT ■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode BASIC OPERATION Press E STRAIGHT (or Q STRAIGHT) so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. English 47 En USING AUDIO FEATURES Using audio features y Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to L AMP. Enjoying pure hi-fi sound Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Press G PURE DIRECT (or P PURE DIRECT) to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off. The G PURE DIRECT button lights up while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display automatically dims. Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 72). 1 Press C LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Display Notes • The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level settings) – operating video functions (video conversion, etc.) • The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. y The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. Adjusting the tonal quality Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right speaker channels. 2 Rotate the D PROGRAM selector to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. 48 En Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker • Once you press C LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing D k / n. • Instead of “SUR.B.L” and “SUR.B.R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71). • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. Press C TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). FRONT L y y 1 Adjusted speaker 2 Press D l / h to adjust the speaker output level. • Press D h to increase the value. • Press D l to decrease the value. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Using audio features Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Press U STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. y Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: –when the Pure Direct mode (see page 48) is selected. –when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). –when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 72). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the D PROGRAM selector on the front panel. • See page 64 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo” mode. Selecting the night listening mode BASIC OPERATION The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. 1 Press W NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press D l / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. English 49 En FM/AM TUNING FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Rotate the I INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. 1 Rotate the I INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Lights up AUTO AFM89.10MHz AFM89.10MHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press 5 h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press 5 l to tune into a lower frequency. 50 En No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. y Hold down the button to continue searching. FM/AM tuning Notes Automatic preset tuning • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” below. • Only Radio Data System broadcasting station are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning (Europe model only). You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Rotate the I INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press and hold 6 MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. Flashes AUTO Manual preset tuning You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. 1 Tune into a station. See page 50 for tuning instructions. 2 Press 6 MEMORY on the front panel. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. MEMORY BASIC OPERATION 1 A1:FM89.10MHz MEMORY Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y • You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations. Press 4 A/B/C/D/E and then 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3 to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. • You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM stations automatically. Press 2 PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press 5 PRESET/TUNING l after pressing and holding 6 MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. Flashes 3 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY A:FM89.10MHz Preset station group Colon (:) English 51 En FM/AM tuning 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press 5 h to select a higher preset station number. • Press 5 l to select a lower preset station number. 2 Flashes Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front panel (or D PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. MEMORY A1:FM89.10MHz A1:FM89.10MHz Preset station number 5 Press 6 MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. A1:FM89.10MHz Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using 4 A/B/C/D/E and 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front panel. See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column. 2 Press and hold 2 EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. The displayed station has been stored as A1. Flashes Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. Selecting preset stations MEMORY E1:FM89.10MHz Flashes 3 You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. Select preset station “A5” using 4 A/B/C/D/ E and 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column. y Flashes When performing this operation with the remote control, set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E (or press D A/B/C/D/E l / h) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. 52 En MEMORY A5:FM89.10MHz Flashes 4 Press 2 EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. Displaying the Radio Data System information Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using the automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 51). • You can also use PTY SEEK mode to tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station from the preset ones. 2 Press G FREQ/TEXT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes • You can select one of the Radio Data System display modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • You can select only the available Radio Data System display modes being offered by the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System display modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, press 7 TUNING AUTO/ MAN’L on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. PS PTY RT CT BASIC OPERATION 1 Frequency display • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “CT” to display the current time. English 53 En Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY SEEK mode) Use this feature to select the desired radio program by program type from the all preset Radio Data System broadcasting stations. 4 Press D PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control to select the desired program type. The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. y Use the automatic preset tuning feature to preset Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 51). POP M 1 Lights up 2 3 Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press B TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. Program type Descriptions NEWS News Press C BAND repeatedly to select “FM” as the reception band. AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information Press G PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK mode. The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in the front panel display. SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Popular music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easylistening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music NEWS Flashes y To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press G PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control again. 54 En Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) 5 Press G PTY SEEK START on the remote control to start searching for all the available Radio Data System preset stations. The name of the selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display while this unit is searching for stations. POP M Flashes PTY HOLD Lights up y To stop searching for stations, press G PTY SEEK START on the remote control again. • This unit stops searching for stations when a station broadcasting the selected program type is found. • If the station found is not the one you desire, press G PTY SEEK START again to resume searching for another station broadcasting the same program type. Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other networks) data service of the Radio Data System station network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all the available preset stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data service of the selected program type for a certain duration of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this unit automatically switches to the local station broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back to the national station once the EON data service ends. Notes • You can use this feature only when the EON data service is available. • The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data System station. 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. 2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel display, select another Radio Data System program so that the EON indicator lights up. BASIC OPERATION Notes Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data service EON 3 Press G EON on the remote control repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or SPORT). The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. NEWS Lights up To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display. 55 En English y USING IPOD™ Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 46). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 84. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 107. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. • Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). The DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode. Controlling iPod™ ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode y y • The name of the song being played also appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). • You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSDSOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Notes You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. 56 En Using iPod™ 1 Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press R DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings ■ The function of the play information display 7 All 1 2 3 4 Top > > > > > > > iPod[Play] 1/9 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia ||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 5 6 8 9 1 Track number/total tracks 2 Name of the artist 2 3 Name of the album 4 Name of the song 5 Progress bar 6 Elapsed time 7 Shuffle and repeat icons 8 h (playback), e (pausing), f (search forward) and w (search backward) BASIC OPERATION Press D k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod menu and then press D ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat 9 Remaining time Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. y When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. y When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. 1 All English 57 En RECORDING Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Caution The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • TONE CONTROL (see page 48) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 72) and the sound field programs (see page 42) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Rotate the I INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (B)) to select the source component you want to record from. 58 En 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Advanced sound configurations Changing sound field parameter settings 4 You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. PARAMETER Cursor Note You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 80). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press R DISPLAY on the remote control. The following status screen appears in the OSD. MOVIE Sci-Fi INPUT:DVD A.SEL:HDMI NIGHT:OFF [RETURN]:STATUS y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 61. • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press D k / n to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold D l / h to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 80). • You can select the amount of time that the current status is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). 5 3 Press one of the sound field program selector buttons (U) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. MOVIE Sci-Fi 1/2 PROLOGIC DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;16ms P.ROOM.SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms . ADVANCED OPERATION STATUSVOL:-40.0dB Press D k / n to select the desired sound field parameter and then D l / h to change the selected sound field parameter value. Press R DISPLAY to turn off the sound field parameter display. English 59 En Advanced sound configurations ■ Basic configuration of sound field programs y To change sound field parameter settings, see page 59 for details. Adjusting the vertical dialogue position (DIALG.LIFT) Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the video monitor screen. Each sound field program has some parameters defining the characteristics of the program. To customize the selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/ or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters. Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound field programs (DSP LEVEL) Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to adjust the level of the effect sounds. The ideal dialogue position. If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”. Move up to the ideal dialogue position. The DSP effect sound level is low. The DSP effect sound level is high. Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows: Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 “0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the highest position. Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when Notes • The effect sound of the selected sound field program is too weak. • You cannot recognize any difference between the sound field programs. • “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72). • You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position. Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when • The sound is vague. • You feel that the additional sound effect is excessive. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB 60 En Advanced sound configurations ■ Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail. y To change sound field parameter settings, see page 59 for details. Sound field parameter Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. y When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Features Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay Sound source ADVANCED OPERATION Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms English 61 En Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. y When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 62 En Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s REV.DELAY 60 dB Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. ADVANCED OPERATION Level Control range: 0 to 250 ms Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control range: 0 to 100% Level REV.LEVEL REV.TIME Source sound REV. LEVEL English Time 63 En Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter 2ch Stereo DIRECT Features 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 48). • Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 70). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 71) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 70). 7ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL 7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers. 2ch Enhancer 7ch Enhancer 2-channel and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. Control range: 0 to 100% Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. ■ Selecting decoders used with sound field programs (Decoder Type) Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”). See page 45 for details about MOVIE sound field program. Available decoders Decoder Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLIIx Movie PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). Neo:6 Cinema 64 En DTS processing for movie sources Selecting decoders ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels. Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press U SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired surround decoder. You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press DISPLAY and then D k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the selected parameter by pressing D l / h repeatedly on the remote control. Advanced sound configurations ■ Decoder descriptions Remote control button Category of the program Name of the program SURROUND DECODE PLIIxMusic PLIIMusic SUR.DECODE 9 Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH Program description Available sound field parameters (see page 66) SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Movie PL II Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Music PL II Music ADVANCED OPERATION Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). PANORAMA SUR.DECODE 9 DIMENSION SURROUND DECODE CENTER WIDTH PLIIx Game PL II Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources. SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources. C. IMAGE y When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program. English 65 En Advanced sound configurations Decoder parameter descriptions Decoder parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 66 En CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 28). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover frequency, and the assignment of the EXTRA SP terminal. 70 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 72 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the distance of each speaker. 73 D)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 73 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 74 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 74 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 74 H)HDMI SET Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals. 75 I)EXTD SUR. Selects the mode of the decoders for the 6.1/7.1-channel playback. 75 ADVANCED OPERATION A)SPEAKER SET Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 76 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 77 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each input source. 78 D)DECODER MODE Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 78 E)MULTI CH SET Sets the input channel numbers and other parameters of the input multi channel. 78 English 67 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 79 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 80 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. 80 D)PARAM.INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 80 E)ZONE 2 SET Adjusts the Zone 2 parameters. 80 F)DOCK SET Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode. 81 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 40). 68 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Using SET MENU 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • Press E RETURN to return to the previous menu level. 1 MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 . A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)EQUALIZER E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO 2/2 [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 4 1 SOUND MENU . F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET H)HDMI SET I)EXTD SUR. p p Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press N SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. SET MENU Press D k / n repeatedly and then press D ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. Press D k / n repeatedly and then press D ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “LFE LEVEL” is selected. p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter SOUND MENU E)LFE LEVEL 2 . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB Press D k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP” and then D ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. p Press D k / n to select the desired parameter and then D l / h to change the parameter settings. 6 Press N SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. . 1 SOUND MENU 2 INPUT MENU 3 OPTION MENU ADVANCED OPERATION 5 MANUAL SETUP p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust English 69 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 1 SOUND MENU Use this feature to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 28). MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 . F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET H)HDMI SET I)EXTD SUR. p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p . A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)EQUALIZER E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. SOUND MENU . EXTRA SP ASSIGN ZONE2 >FRONT B PRESENCE NONE FRONT B;;;;FRONT PRIORITY;;;;;--ZONE2 SET Not Available Extra speakers assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals. Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE When you use the alternative front speaker system (see page 38) Select “FRONT B”. When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see page 96) Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers to the Zone 2 speakers. When you use the presence speakers (see page 12) Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the speakers to the presence speakers. When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP terminals. Notes • This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “AUTO SETUP”. • If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 101), you cannot select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”. • After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out “AUTO SETUP” again (see page 28). 70 En FRONT B speakers setting FRONT B The “FRONT B” parameter is available only when you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”. Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B speakers. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on or off when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main room. • Select “ZONE B” if the FRONT B speakers are set in another room. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones and the EXTRA SP terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46). Presence/Surround back channel priority PRIORITY The “PRIORITY” parameter is available only when you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”. Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the surround back speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRNS, SUR. B • Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channels will be output from the surround speakers. • Select “SUR. B” to use the surround back speakers when surround back channel signals are detected in a CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals are output from the front speakers. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE SOUND MENU SOUND MENU FRONT SP SMALL >LARGE SUR. L/R SP NONE >SML LRG When the front speakers are large Select “LARGE” (large). When the surround speakers are large Select “LRG” (large). When the front speakers are small Select “SMALL” (small). When the surround speakers are small Select “SML” (small). Note When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 70), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG When you do not use the surround speakers Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46), and “SUR. B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Surround back left/right speakers SUR. B L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 SOUND MENU ADVANCED OPERATION SUR.B L/R SP SOUND MENU CENTER SP SMLx1 >SMLx2 NONE >SML LRG When the center speaker is large Select “LRG” (large). When the center speaker is small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the center speaker Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. LRGx1 When the surround back left and right speakers are large Select “LRGx2” (large x 2). When the single surround back speaker is large Select “LRGx1” (large x 1). When the surround back left and right speakers are small Select “SMLx2” (small x 2). When the single surround back speaker is small Select “SMLx1” (small x 1). When you do not use the surround back speakers Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. English 71 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE SOUND MENU SOUND MENU LFE/BASS OUT SUBWOOFER PHASE SWFR FRNT>BOTH When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. When you do not use a subwoofer Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. Bass crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 71). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 71). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz SOUND MENU >NORMAL REVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB SOUND MENU . SPEAKER LEVEL B)SPEAKER LEVEL 1/2 -__________+ FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; SWFR;;;;;;;;;; Adjusted speaker FL Front left speaker FR Front right speaker C Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SL Surround left speaker SR Surround right speaker SBR Surround back right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker PL Presence left speaker PR Presence right speaker CROSSOVER Notes FREQ;;;80Hz 72 En • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71). Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE ■ Equalizer D)EQUALIZER Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the graphic equalizer. Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT Use this feature to select the type of equalizer. Choices: AUTO PEQ, CENTER GEQ, EQ OFF SOUND MENU D)EQUALIZER SOUND MENU . C)SP DISTANCE 1/2 Adjusted speaker • Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28). • Select “CENTER GEQ” to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front left and right speakers. Press D k / n to display the graphic equalizer screen. • Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature. Note When you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 28), “AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting. Test tone TEST SOUND MENU p . TEST >OFF ON -______+ 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back left speaker SB R Surround back right speaker PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p FRONT L ADVANCED OPERATION Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/CENTER/SWFR/SUR. L/SUR. R/ PRNS L/PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) SB L/SB R: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) p Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. [ ]/[]:CT GEQ [p]/[[]:Select p p p . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONT L;;;3.00m FRONT R;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;3.00m SWFR;;;;;;3.00m [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust SP DISTANCE EQ TYPE SELECT CENTER GEQ Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and front left speakers. Notes English • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/ R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71). 73 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ Use to match the tonal quality of the center speaker with that of the front left and right speakers. You can adjust 5 frequency bands (100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and 10 kHz). Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB SOUND MENU 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p p TEST >OFF ON -______+ . 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. SOUND MENU F)DYNAMIC RANGE y Press D k / n to select a frequency band and D l / h to adjust the selected frequency band. . SP: MIN STD>MAX HP: MIN STD>MAX The “CENTER GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “CENTER GEQ” is selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB SOUND MENU Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. SOUND MENU G)AUDIO SET . MUTING TYPE;FULL A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms MAX VOL.;+16.5dB INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select p E)LFE LEVEL p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Note . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. 74 En Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 40). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –5.0 dB to –80.0 dB. Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Notes • When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX VOL.” setting. • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting. For example, if “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. • Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume level in Zone 2 (see page 81). Initial volume INI VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. • Use “INI VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume level in Zone 2 (see page 81). ■ HDMI setting H)HDMI SET Use this feature to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals. The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. ■ Extended surround decoders I)EXTD SUR. Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders by using the connected surround back speakers. SOUND MENU I)EXTD SUR. . MODE;;;;;;;;AUTO [p]/[[]:Select Mode MODE Use this feature to select the mode of the decoder driving. Choices: AUTO, ON, OFF • Select “AUTO” to activate the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels when a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input. • Select “ON” to play back multi-channel sources using the selected decoder type in “TYPE”. • Select “OFF” not to use the decoders to create 6.1/7.1 channels. Decoder type TYPE SOUND MENU I)EXTD SUR. . MODE;;;;;;;;;;ON TYPE;;;PLIIxMovie p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select H)HDMI SET SUPPORT AUDIO: RX-V661 [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return Use this feature to select the decoders used to play back multi-channel sources when you select “ON” in “MODE”. Choices: PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, EX • Select “PLIIxMovie” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. • Select “PLIIx Music” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. • Select “EX/ES” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. • Select “EX” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. 75 En English Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Choices: RX-V661, OTHER • Select “RX-V661” to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. p SOUND MENU ADVANCED OPERATION Notes Note Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) y Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources correctly. Notes Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. MANUAL SETUP 2 INPUT MENU p . A)I/O ASSIGNMENT B)INPUT RENAME C)VOLUME TRIM D)DECODER MODE E)MULTI CH SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the speakers and the input sources. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases: – when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 71) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the stereo playback, Compressed Music Enhancer (see page 46) or Pure Direct (see page 48) mode is selected. – when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 101). • When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. 2 INPUT MENU ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). y The input source name in parentheses indicates the default assigned input source. For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V INPUT Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR [C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR INPUT MENU CMPNT-V INPUT . [A];;;;; DVD ( DVD ) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL)) [C];;;;; DVR ( DVR ) 76 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT Choices: (1) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR For HDMI IN jacks 1 and 2 HDMI IN Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR [IN2] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR INPUT MENU INPUT MENU HDMI IN . [IN1];;; DVD ( DVD ) [IN2];;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL)) OPTICAL OUT . (1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. DVD -> MY DVD [[]/[[]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Chara. y 1 Press one of the input selector buttons (B) on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. 2 Press D l / h to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 COAXIAL IN Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR (6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR 3 Press D k / n to select the character you want to use and then press D l / h to move to the next space. ADVANCED OPERATION • This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. • You can only rename DOCK when iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. OPTICAL IN . (2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) (3);;;;; DVD ( DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) p INPUT MENU B)INPUT RENAME p For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 OPTICAL IN Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR (3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR (4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR INPUT MENU Notes INPUT MENU • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press D n to change the character in the following order, or press D k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space. COAXIAL IN . (5);;;;; CD ( CD ) (6);;;;; DVD ( DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBLTA Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press D ENTER on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. 77 En English 4 Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the output level of each input source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: TUNER, PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/ CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX, DOCK, MULTI CH Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ Multi channel input settings E)MULTI CH SET Use this feature to set the function of the multi channel input. INPUT MENU E)MULTI CH SET . BGV;;;;; LAST INPUT CH;;;;;6CH p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select INPUT MENU C)VOLUME TRIM MY DVD DVD -> 0.0dB [[]/[[]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit y • You can adjust the value for DOCK only when iPod is stationed to the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. • The default name (“DVD” in the display example above) and the new name (“MY DVD”) of the selected input source appears in the OSD. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE INPUT MENU D)DECODER MODE . >AUTO CD MD/CD-R DVD 1/2 LAST ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR, LAST, OFF • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. • Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video source in the background. Input channels INPUT CH Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6CH, 8CH • Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals. • Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals. Front input FRONT p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select INPUT MENU E)MULTI CH SET DTS decoder prioritize setting Choices: AUTO, DTS • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the input mode. 78 En [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select p • Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used for the connected input source. . BGV;;;;; LAST INPUT CH;;;;;8CH FRONT;;; DVD p Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the analog jacks at which the front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR y See page 22 for the connection information. Note The “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. MANUAL SETUP 3 OPTION MENU MANUAL SETUP 1/2 . A)DISPLAY SET B)MEMORY GUARD C)AUDIO SELECT D)PARAM. INI 3 OPTION MENU 2/2 . E)ZONE2 SET F)DOCK SET p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET OPTION MENU A)DISPLAY SET OPTION MENU 1/2 . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEO CONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 2/2 [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select A)DISPLAY SET . OSD-SOURCE;;;30s OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s FL SCROLL;;;CONT Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and component video signals interchangeably. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. Notes • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. • When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals even if you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD continuously during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the status and sound field parameters information screen after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. ADVANCED OPERATION Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press D l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press D h to make the front panel display brighter. OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press D l to raise the position of the OSD. • Press D h to lower the position of the OSD. Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “DOCK” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. English 79 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON OPTION MENU B)MEMORY GUARD >OFF ON [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – sound field program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels – SCENE template parameters ■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM.INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO, ENHANCER, SUR. DECODE OPTION MENU D)PARAM. INI CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB *ENTERTAINMENT *MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE Press DSP Key Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST OPTION MENU C)AUDIO SELECT >AUTO LAST Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”. ■ Zone 2 settings E)ZONE2 SET [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return E)ZONE2 SET . MAX VOL.;+16.5dB INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select p • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate audio input jack select setting. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last audio input jack select setting used for the connected input source. OPTION MENU Zone 2 Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the Zone 2. Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to – 30.0 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Notes • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. For example, when “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. • The “MAX VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the “ZONE 2 OUT” jacks. 80 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Zone 2 Initial volume INI VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Notes • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. • When you select “FRONT B”, “PRNS” or “NONE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 70), “Zone 2 SP Not Assigned” appears in the OSD and the “ZONE2 SET” parameter is not available. • The “INI VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the ZONE 2 OUT jacks. ■ iPod universal dock setting F)DOCK SET OPTION MENU F)DOCK SET STANDBY CHARGE: AUTO [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 56). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby mode. • Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod only when this unit is turned on. English 81 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 85). Using the remote control for the SCENE feature ■ Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 85). 1 2 If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. Press the desired A SCENE button on the remote control. 1 Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. Press and hold the A SCENE button and the desired input selector button (A). The transmit indicator (X) flashes twice. 2 Keep holding down the buttons pressed in step 2 until “OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER SCENE SCENE buttons 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD * AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE TV Set to SOURCE MUTE SET MENU MENU AUDIO BAND PURE DIRECT ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 MOVIE 4 NIGHT 8 SLEEP ENT REC FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME Note These buttons control the input source component. See page 84 for details of the function of each button. 82 En Note If the setting of the input source is not successful, “NG” appears in the display window (J). In this case, repeat the setting procedure. SELECT * ■ Setting the input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control Remote control features Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the operation mode selector to L AMP to control this unit. Set the operation mode selector to LTV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 85). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV/CBL. *2 POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY *1 POWER *1 SCENE 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R DTV/CBL DVR VCR POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER SCENE 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN CD V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DVD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD 4 3 4 SELECT SELECT AMP AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME SOURCE SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE *1 TV *1 – – TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU MENU – TV MUTE PRESET/CH TITLE AUDIO SET MENU MENU PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT A/B/C/D/E LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN STRAIGHT 2 3 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL MOVIE LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 1 NIGHT STEREO 8 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE ENT ON EON MACRO FREQ/TEXT MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR OFF RENAME Notes *1 *2 8 ENT REC REC FREQ/TEXT 4 NIGHT SLEEP SLEEP OFF MOVIE ADVANCED OPERATION 1 STEREO *1 DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL AUDIO BAND BAND *2 TV These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode selector is set to L AMP. ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to LTV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 84. English 83 En Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons (B), or . You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 85). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button (B), or . Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. 1 POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER SCENE 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 4 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 2 3 4 5 6 LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU AUDIO BAND PURE DIRECT ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 1 STEREO 3 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 MOVIE 4 7 8 9 NIGHT 8 SLEEP ENT 0 REC FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START SOURCE y OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME TV The remote control has 12 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 12 different components. DVD player/ DVD recorder 1 2 3 AV POWER Power *1 VCR Cable TV/ Satellite tuner TV LD player CD player MD recorder/ Tape deck CD recorder Tuner Power *1 Power *1 VCR power Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Title *2 TITLE Title Title Title ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select Menu up Menu up Menu up Preset up (1 to 8) Up Menu down Preset down (1 to 8) Down Preset down (A to E) Previous menu Preset up (A to E) Subsequent menu PRESET/CH k PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Band A/B/C/D/E l Menu left Menu left Menu left A/B/C/D/E h Menu right Menu right Menu right 4 5 6 7 8 0 A Power *1 iPod Subsequent menu Direction A/B RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward DVR search backward *2 DVR search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward *3 hh Search forward Search forward DVR search forward *2 DVR search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward *3 b Skip backward DVR skip backward DVR skip backward Chapter/Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Direction back Skip backward a Skip forward DVR skip forward DVR skip forward Chapter/Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec Rec (recorder) DVR rec *2 Disc skip Rec Rec DVR rec *2 s Stop Stop DVR stop Stop Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause DVR pause *2 DVR pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause (Play/Pause) *4 p Play Play DVR play *2 DVR play *2 Play Play Play Play (Play/Pause) *4 MENU Menu Menu Menu AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display Display Display Enter/recall Enter ENT *2 DVR stop *2 Stop Play Previous menu Audio Enter Display Display Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your VCR or DVR when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 85). *3 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *4 Simple remote mode (see page 56). *2 84 En Display Remote control features ■ Selecting a component to be controlled You can select a component to be controlled independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons. Press J SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the desired component. The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. SELECT Remote control code default settings ■ Controlling optional components (Option mode) “OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the option mode, press J SELECT k / n repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Note You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See page 87 to program buttons operated within this component control area. Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code PHONO TV – – MULCH CH IN DVD YAMAHA 2100 LD YAMAHA 2200 TAPE YAMAHA 2700 V-AUX/ DOCK TUNER YAMAHA 2606 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602 MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400 CD CD YAMAHA 2300 DTV/CBL TV – – DVR DVR YAMAHA 2807 VCR VCR – – DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100 ADVANCED OPERATION SELECT Input area Note You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 1 Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press an input selector button (B), or to select the input area you want to set up. PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD AMP SOURCE TV English 85 En Remote control features 2 Press and hold T LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window (J) on the remote control. 4 Press the numeric buttons (F) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. LEARN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 9 0 MOVIE y • You can set a remote control code of a different type of component to an input area. Press D l / h repeatedly to change the library (component category). Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner), L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR • If you want to setup for another input area, press the input selector button, or , or press J SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the input area. 5 y If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button (B) or , or J SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 2 through 5. Notes • Be sure to press and hold T LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. Press D ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. 6 Press T LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 3 Press D ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window (J). Note 7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether you can control your component using the remote control. “0000” appears in the display window (J) if no code has been set. POWER or AV y If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls” on page 87) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 86 En Remote control features Programming codes from other remote controls 2 STANDBY POWER POWER 4 SCENE POWER 3 CD 2 DVD AV MULTI CH IN VCR MD/CD-R 1 PHONO DVR TUNER TV DTV/CBL V-AUX/DOCK SELECT You can program remote control codes from other remote controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can be programmed independently for each input area. Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. Other remote control LEVEL POWER POWER TV AV 1 2 STANDBY POWER PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU AUDIO 5 to 10 cm BAND PURE DIRECT SCENE ENTER 3 4 A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL 1 STEREO LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 MOVIE 4 NIGHT 3 8 SLEEP ENT SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME REC SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TV FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR Press T LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the name of the selected input area (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window (J) on the remote control. RENAME LEARN Note 1 Notes • Do not press and hold T LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 3. Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press an input selector button(B), or to select a an input area. Note Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to L SOURCE. When you set the operation mode selector to L AMP and program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this unit. 4 ADVANCED OPERATION The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control. Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. English 87 En Remote control features 5 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. “NG” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. Changing source names in the display window You can change the name of the input source that appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is useful when you have set an input area to control a different component. CD 3 STANDBY 4 POWER SCENE 2 AV MULTI CH IN DVD POWER 1 VCR MD/CD-R TV PHONO DVR TUNER POWER DTV/CBL SELECT V-AUX/DOCK 1 Other remote control Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press an input selector button (B), or to select the input area you want to rename. The name of the selected input area appears in the display window (J). AMP SOURCE y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 and 5. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press J SELECT k / n to select the component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD TV or AMP SOURCE TV Press T LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN 2 Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – when the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. 88 En Press T RENAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RENAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. Remote control features 3 Press D k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing D n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. Pressing D k changes the characters in reverse order. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Macro programming features The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 91). ■ MACRO operations 4 Macro buttons Press D h to move the cursor to the next position. POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER REC SCENE PRESET/CH 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD FREQ/TEXT 4 OFF ENTER A/B/C/D/E EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN MACRO ON/OFF 1 y ON CLEAR RENAME MACRO Set the T MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON. Press D l to move the cursor to the previous position. 5 Press D ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window(J) on the remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y If you continuously want to rename another input area, press the input selector button (B), , or , or press J SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 5. MACRO LEARN CLEAR 2 Press the desired macro button. 3 Set the T MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF when you finish to using the macro programming operation. OFF 6 ON ADVANCED OPERATION OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR Press RENAME again to exit the renaming mode. RENAME Notes Note “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • While the remote control is running a macro program, it does not accept any other operation until it has completed running the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. y English This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. Refer to “Input rename” on page 77. 89 En Remote control features ■ Default macro functions Pressing macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY POWER POWER — — (*1) POWER (*2) TV PHONO PHONO MULCH CH IN MULCH CH IN — — — — — V-AUX/DOCK V-AUX/DOCK TUNER TUNER POWER MD/CD-R (*1) MD/CD-R CD CD DTV/CBL DTV/CBL DVR DVR VCR VCR — (*3) — (MD/CD-R area) (*4) (CD area) (*4) — (DVR area) (*4) (VCR area) (*4) DVD DVD (DVD area) (*4) *1 You can turn on some components (including Yamaha components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component. *2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 85), you can turn on the power of your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV/CBL takes priority over the one for PHONO. *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. *4 Playback can be started for any Yamaha remote control-compatible CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that component (see page 87) or set a remote control code (see page 85). 90 En Remote control features ■ Programming macro operations You can program your own macro and use the macro programming feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window (J) if you press a button other than a macro button. 3 Notes • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. 1 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press T MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. The following example is for programming the following procedure: Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press POWER. Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press DVD. Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press STRAIGHT. MCR 1: POWER POWER POWER TV AV POWER STANDBY 1 SCENE AMP 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 LEVEL 4 PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU AUDIO BAND PURE DIRECT 3 ENTER V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD SOURCE A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY TV MCR 3: STRAIGHT 2 or MCR 2: DVD MACRO ADVANCED OPERATION AMP SOURCE Indicates the number of macro steps entered TV Note Flashes alternately so you can set the next step If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window (J) on the remote control. STANDBY POWER PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD Note To change the selected input area, press J SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas J SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area. 4 Press T MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or similar object when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) if you press more than one button simultaneously. English 91 En Remote control features Clearing configurations You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names and setup remote control ID. ■ Clearing function sets 3 Press and hold T CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window (J). If clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. CLEAR 1 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press T CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window (J). AMP Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). SOURCE TV or CLEAR AMP SOURCE TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press D k / n to select the clear mode. L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area) Clears all learned functions in the respective input area. The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector button to select the input area. L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the amplifier functions of this unit. L;ALL Clears all learned functions. M;ALL Clears all programmed macros. RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. 92 En y Notes • “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. • “C;NG” appears in the display window (J) if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Remote control features ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 3 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press an input selector button(B), or to select the input area containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window (J). Press and hold T CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window (J) if clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control, release the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press T CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. AMP SOURCE TV or PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN DTV/CBL AMP DVR VCR CLEAR RENAME DVD SOURCE y TV Press T CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window (J). LEARN 4 Press T LEARN again to exit. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. • If you continuously want to clear another function for another component, press J SELECT k / n to select the input area, then repeat step 3. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press more than one button simultaneously. Notes • Do not press and hold T LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. English 93 En Remote control features ■ Clearing a macro function You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 2 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press T MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Press and hold T CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if clearing was successful. V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD AMP SOURCE TV OFF or ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME MACRO AMP y SOURCE • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 2. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 3 Press T MACRO again to exit the macro programming mode. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press more than one button simultaneously. 94 En USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION Using multi-zone configuration This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connecting Zone 2 You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below. REMOTE REMOTE Infrared signal receiver OUT REMOTE IN OUT Yamaha component This unit REMOTE IN ADVANCED OPERATION IN OUT Yamaha component ■ Using the external amplifier Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows. From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks Amplifier Main zone Second zone (Zone 2) Infrared signal receiver Remote control DVD player This unit Infrared signal emitter From the REMOTE OUT jacks From the REMOTE IN jacks English Note To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 95 En Using multi-zone configuration ■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit Important safety notice The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals and then set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE2” (see page 70). FRONT B/ZONE2/ PRESENCE EXTRA SP L R Second zone (Zone 2) This unit Main zone y • You can use the FRONT B speakers as the front speaker system of another zone. Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B” and then “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 70). • When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone 2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume level and maximum volume level of the Zone 2 speakers (see page 80). Controlling Zone 2 You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are as follows: • Selecting the input source of Zone 2 • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 50) • Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source (see page 56) Note You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection procedure. ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel Turning on Zone 2 Press 8 ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2. y 8 ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. Once B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position, you can also press I POWER or H STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone and Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode. Activating the Zone 2 operation mode Press 9 ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2. The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. ZONE2 Flashes 96 En Using multi-zone configuration Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2 operation mode. Operating Zone 2 Rotate the I INPUT selector to select the desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. • Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 50. • Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod operations, see “Using iPod™” on page 56. y You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press 9 ZONE CONTROL on the front panel again. Turning on or off Zone 2 using the remote control I POWER and H STANDBY on the remote control work differently depending on the selected zone that appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. • When the main zone, Zone 2 mode is selected, you can turn on the main zone or Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode individually. • When the all mode is selected, pressing I POWER turns on the main zone and Zone 2 simultaneously and pressing H STANDBY sets them to the standby mode simultaneously. Control mode Main zone mode Zone 2 mode POWER and STANDBY Display window (J) Name of the selected input area Turns on the main zone only or sets it to the standby mode. “ZONE 2” or “2;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode. I POWER: turns Set Zone 2 to the standby mode Press 8 ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. Activating the Zone 2 operation mode Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press J SELECT k repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. “ZONE 2” is displayed in the display window (J) on the remote control. AMP SOURCE SELECT TV “ALL” Notes • When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when I POWER or H STANDBY is pressed. • “ALL” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control only when SELECT n is pressed. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote control All mode on the main zone and Zone 2. H STANDBY: sets the main zone and Zone 2 to the standby mode. Selecting the input source of Zone 2 Press one of the input selector buttons (B) to select the input source of the selected zone. If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2; name of the selected input area” is displayed in the display window (J) on the remote control when Zone 2 is selected respectively. Note The selected input source is shared across all zones. English 97 En ADVANCED SETUP Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 25). • Only B MASTER ON/OFF, C TONE CONTROL and the D PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. Using the advanced setup 1 Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. 2 Press and hold C TONE CONTROL and then press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. TONE CONTROL While holding down MASTER ON 3 OFF Rotate the D PROGRAM selector to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 99 for a complete list of available parameters. SPIMP.-8MIN Currently selected parameter 98 En Currently selected parameter setting 4 Press C TONE CONTROL repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. 5 Press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. Advanced setup See page 98 for the operation of the advanced setup. ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN • Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* 8Ω MIN ■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition. This feature is useful when you operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/ amplifiers in the same room separately. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is set to “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is set to “2002”. Setting remote control AMP ID codes You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the remote control. 1 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE. 2 Press and hold T LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press D l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround back PRESET/CH If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. LEARN ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER A/B/C/D/E Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 6Ω MIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Notes Surround back * • Be sure to press and hold T LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8Ω MIN”. ■ User presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 109). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. 3 Press D ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Notes English • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. 99 En ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ X Y H A B POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 4 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE C I SCENE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE MUTE AUDIO BAND D K L TV SET MENU MENU J M N O PURE DIRECT P STRAIGHT Q R ENTER U A/B/C/D/E E DISPLAY RETURN LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO NIGHT 5 6 9 0 F STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE 4 NIGHT 7 8 V W 8 SLEEP ENT S REC FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO APPENDIX G CLASSICAL CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME T ii List of remote control codes Liste des codes de commande Liste der Fernbedienungscodes Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes Список кодов дистанционного управления CABLE CD PLAYER ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 iii SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER JVC KLH KENWOOD KOSS LG LIMIT MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MEMOREX MICO MICROSOFT MINTEK MITSUBISHI MUSTEK NESA ONKYO ORITRON PALSONIC PANASONIC PHILIPS 0699 0585, 0650 0744 0517, 0561 0678 0768 0795 0530, 0702 0566 0858 0750 0549 0744 0548 0757 0744 0530 0678 0699 0517, 0659, 1389 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER HITACHI PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER TOSHIBA YAMAHA 2815 2800 2808 2804 2803 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN YAMAHA 0091 0086 0091 0086 0086 0086 0086 0091 0086 0091 0228 0086 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER 1417 VICTOR 0101 WARDS 0041, 0185 YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358, 2601 (TUNER ID1) 2602 (TUNER ID2) 2603 (iPod) 2606 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT 1327 ABSAT 0150 ALBA 0482 ALPHASTAR 0799 AMSTRAD 0874 ASTON 0169, 1156 ASTRO 0200 ATSAT 1327 AVALON 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH 1127 PACE 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS 0056 PIONEER 0054 POLK AUDIO 0056 RCA 0054 REVOX 0056 SANSUI 0056 SONY 0270 THORENS 0056 WARDS 0054 YAMAHA 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC ASA AWA ACURA ADDISON ADMIRAL ADVENT AIKO AKAI AKURA ALBA 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 0131 0036 0036 0119, 0135, 0680 0120, 0190, 0490 0788 0119 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 0291 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 iv APPENDIX 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 CIMLINE 0036 CINERAL 0119, 0478 CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119 CLARION 0207 CLARIVOX 0064 CLATRONIC 0274, 0397 CONDOR 0347, 0397 CONRAC 0835 CONTEC 0036, 0207 CRAIG 0207 CROSLEY 0081 CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 v DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI HISAWA HITACHI HUA TUN HUANYU HYPSON ICE ITS ITT IMPERIAL INDIANA INFINITY INGELEN INNO HIT INNOVA INTEQ INTERFUNK 0036, 0064 0482 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 0036 0401 0064, 0291 0291, 0398 0398 0190, 0388, 0575 0274, 0397, 0445 0064 0081 0190 0543 0064 0044 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 0081 0027 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 JBL JCB JVC MEDION MEGATRON MEMOREX METZ MICROMAXX 0695, 0835, 1064 0172, 0205 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 0474 0835 0835 0044, 0074, 0078 0514 0439 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 MICROSTAR MIDLAND MINERVA MINOKA MITSUBISHI PIONEER SEMIVOX SEMP SHARP SHEN YING SHENG CHIA SIAREM SIEMENS SINUDYNE SKANTIC SKYGIANT SKYWORTH SOLAVOX SONITRON SONOKO SONOLOR SONTEC SONY 0207 0183 0057, 0120, 0677 0036, 0119 0036, 0120, 0263 0543 0064, 0222 0543 0383 0207 0064 0190 0235 0036, 0064 0190, 0235 0064 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE SOWA 0064, 0445 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW STANDARD STARLITE STERN SUPREME SYLVANIA SYMPHONIC SYNCO SYSLINE T+A TCM TMK TNCI TVS TACICO TAI YI TANDY TASHIKO TATUNG TEAC TEC TECHNEMA TECHNICS TECHWOOD TECO TEKNIKA 0198 0036 0207 0190, 0286 0027 0057, 0081, 0198 0198, 0207 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 0064 0474 0835 0205 0044 0490 0036, 0119, 0205 0036 0120, 0190 0119, 0677 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 0274 0347 0078, 0277, 0677 0078 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER TELETECH TENSAI TERA THOMSON THORN TOSHIBA 0347 0036 0347 0057 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH TUNTEX UHER UNIVERSUM 0543 0036, 0057, 0119 0347 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677, 0796, 0860, 2900 (projector), 2901 (projector), 2903, 2904 (projector) YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON CARVER CIMLINE CINERAL CITIZEN COLT COMBITECH CRAIG 0062 0108 0099 0305 0064, 0305, 1305 0099 0379 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 vi APPENDIX 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 RX-V661_G-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 10:57 PM G MINOLTA MITSUBISHI 0069 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WJ70020 RX-V661 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI 0099 KENWOOD 0068, 0094 KODAK 0062, 0064 KOLIN 0068, 0070 KORPEL 0099 LG 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 RX-V661 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ 00_sheet_RX-V861-661_G.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 17, 2007 10:08 AM G RX-V861/RX-V661 The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung. Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen. De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing. Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации. ■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/Фронтальная панель 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL SCENE 2 1 3 4 INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON A OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA B S VIDEO C D E F G H I J VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 00_sheet_RX-V861-661_G.book Page i Wednesday, January 17, 2007 10:08 AM ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/ Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ X Y H A B POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 4 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE – TV MUTE C I SCENE LEVEL – – TV INPUT MUTE PRESET/CH TITLE AUDIO BAND D K L TV SET MENU MENU J M N O PURE DIRECT P STRAIGHT Q R ENTER U A/B/C/D/E E DISPLAY RETURN LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO NIGHT 5 6 9 0 F STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE 4 NIGHT 7 8 V W 8 SLEEP G CLASSICAL CLASSICAL ENT S REC FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME T Printed in Malaysia WK14520-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V661 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V661 Manuale del proprietario
- français: Yamaha RX-V661 Le manuel du propriétaire
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V661 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V661 Brugervejledning
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V661 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V661 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha RX-V661 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha RX-V863 de handleiding
-
Yamaha V150 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V2500 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
-
-
-